Home

ETC Express 125 & 250 v2.0 - Premier Lighting and Production

1. Front Back O O o 12 3456 11123456 0 appendix a installation 259 Installing remote unit software Follow these steps to upgrade software for any Remote Interfaces or Remote Video Interfaces connected to your Express control console via the ETCNet network This will not upgrade software for a Remote Focus Unit RFU 1 Installing a new version of Remote Unit software will not clear system memory but it is always best to be prepared Save your cur rent show 2 Turn the console off 3 Insert the Remote Unit Update software diskette into your console s diskette drive 4 Turn the console back on The console will display the boot screen and the message Loading XX Wait until the loading process is complete and the Remote Unit Update Program Menu appears This menu displays the version number of the software currently being loaded the console address and a list of all remote devices connected to the network remote devices must be turned on to appear It also shows the unit s network address type and current software version If your network devices are turned on but don t appear on the display and your network uses twisted pair wiring press S6 Swap Twst Pair Devices should appear within ten seconds Updating software to all remote devices To update the software on all remote devices press S1 Update All Units Updating software
2. Pending cue will play back next time either Go button is pressed Yellow Cue is in a fader and is selected in Stage Gold Cue is in a fader but is not selected in Stage Light red Cue is currently running and is selected in Stage Dark red Cue is currently running but is not selected in Stage iia Cue is selected in Stage or Blind Fader Status display The fader status display consists of two windows at the bottom of the dis play It provides information about the cues loaded to the console s fad ers including fade times and rates The left window monitors the A B fader the right window monitors the C D fader The display counts down wait times for cues and indicates which step is running when an effect is active The illustration below shows where each piece of information appears O 2 Cue Dw Hold EF Step 6 Fader Cue in fader Upfade information or effect fade times Downfade information or effect step Sees chapter 9 playing back cues Selecting and playing a cue 93 Selecting a cue moves it to the top of the Cue List It will not run until you press Go Follow these steps to select a cue and play it on the fader of your choice Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press Cue 3 Press 11 1 51 Press Enter 5 Press Go on fader A B 6 Press Go on fader C D Action Selects Stage display mode Prompt reads Selec
3. 296 Express User Manual Stop Printer Stop Printer is softkey S1 in the Print Functions display Press S1 Stop Printer to cancel a print function It may take a few moments for the printer to halt if its buffer is full Style Style is softkey S2 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Subroutine display Use S2 Style to select or edit the sytle of a subroutine control step Style steps subroutine A style is assigned to a subroutine step When the subroutine runs the steps play back in numeric order until the subroutine reaches a style step The style step then determines whether the subroutine will loop bounce hold or end and run a different cue Press Style to select or edit the style of a subroutine control step Example Step 5 Style 1 Enter sets the style of step 5 to loop Sub Use Sub to select a submaster number Example Record Sub 1 Enter records the current look in submaster 1 Example Group Sub 1 At 7 5 sets the channels in submaster 1 at 75 percent of their recorded levels Sub List Sub List is softkey S2 in the Blind Submaster displays Use S2 Sub List to access the Submaster List display which provides a list of submasters their fade times and labels Submaster A submaster consists of a slider a bump button and one LED The slider allows you to bring the submaster look up manually The bump button allows you to flash the submaster to its full
4. Express back panel Express User Manual Cc C qa DC DG JC 2C DC JE gt C gt C gt C gt C gt C DG Di JK DG DC 2 gt C gt C gt C gt Lamps 12V Ext eves HEN DMX512 SSF F 1 6A 1 512 513 1024 5 x 20mm PUSH gt ef O Power Input CRT Display Parallel Printer TOA OIA Twisted Pair 1 y o CCDS Qro Oa LA Es ThinNet appendix a installation 245 Installing console and monitor Follow these steps to install Express and its monitor 1 Place console on a hard stable flat surface Leave at least six inches of space behind console for ventilation and cable clearance Console should be at least six feet from dimmers and high current AC lines Caution Do not leave the console in a road case tray or on a soft sur face This will inhibit proper ventilation 2 Move console power switch by fan on back panel to the Off position 3 Connect the video cable from the monitor to the appropriate console connector labeled CRT Display on the back panel 4 Insert the female end of the console power cord in the connector on the power supply Insert the round 6 pin connector on the power supply cord in the connector labeled Power input on the console s
5. Follow this example to modify a cue in Cue List display Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press S2 Cue List 3 Use the keypad to enter the cue s to modify Use And Except and Thrul to select multiple cues 4 Press gt until the cursor reaches the attribute you wish to edit 5 Enter the new setting for the attribute and press Enter Action Selects Blind display mode Displays Cue List Selects desired cue s Prompt reads Select cue number s The prompt indicates your options or prompts you to enter a new setting Setting change is reflected on cue list chapter 6 cues 71 Editing cue attributes in Cue List The Cue List allows you to edit attributes across a range of cues simulta neously For example if you wanted cues 1 through 5 to have upfade wait times of ten seconds you could set them all in one command Follow these steps to do so Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind S2 Cue List Displays Cue List Prompt reads Select cue number s 2 Press 1 Thru 5 Selects cues 1 through 5 3 Press Wait Prompt reads Enter upfade wait time 4 Press 1 0 Enter Sets upfade wait time for cues 1 through 5 to 10 72 Express User Manual chapter 7 track Track record function Track record allows you to record cues and modify recorded cues Addi tionally it allows you to designate whether or not the levels in the dis played cue should track into subsequent cues unti
6. 9 30 AM 1625 4 25 PM In 12 hour format use to select AM or PM Press Enter Time is set Date is highlighted Enter the day of the month New date is set Month is high 1 31 and press Enter lighted 6 Enter the month 1 12 and New month is set Year is high press Enter lighted 7 Enter the year 00 99 and New year is set Day is high press Enter lighted 8 Enter the day of the week New day is set Time is high 1 7 and press Enter lighted 9 Press Record to reset Returns to Setup display Real Time Clock with the new settings chapter 4 patch Before you begin creating cues for a show you should first create your patch The patch assigns individual dimmers to control channel numbers Express s Patch display allows you to assign up to 1 024 DMX512 dim mers to up to the maximum number of control channels your console can address You can use Express s default one to one patch or you may create a custom patch In addition Express s proportional patching capability allows you to set dimmer output levels and assign one of ten output pro files to dimmers If you are patching dimmers in a Strand CD80 dimmer rack see page 34 for special instructions Before patching be certain that the system settings reflect the total number of available dimmers and channels See Chapter 3 Entering system settings on pages 14 and 14 for information on setting the number of dimmers and channels This chapter inc
7. At 5 4 Press Time and enter the Selects Sneak time of ten time for the sneak For seconds example press Time Prompt reads 1110 Sneak mode Select time 5 Press Enter Fades channel 5 to 50 percent over ten seconds Follow these steps to restore a channel to its last fader or submaster level Keystrokes Action 1 Press Sneak and select Selects channel 5 to sneak the channel s you want to Prompt reads Sneak mode restore For example Select channels then press press 5 ENTER to sneak or AT to select sneak level or TIME to select sneak time 2 Press Enter Fades channel 5 back to its most recent cue or sub level Note Press Sneak Enter to restore all channels to their current fader or submaster levels 44 Express User Manual Channel check Use a Channel Check to check which channel controls which light Express allows you to check channels by selecting a single channel and setting it at a level Once you have selected a channel you can then advance sequentially through the channels checking one at a time Follow these steps to run a channel check Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display Prompt reads Select channel numbers Press Channel 1 Corner reads Chan 1 3 Press and hold S8 Flash Sets channel 1 s level to 100 per cent if its current level is at or below 50 percent or Sets channel 1 s level to zero if its current level is above 50 per ce
8. Clear 7 S 4 5 6 Thru At A B Back Sub Group 1 2 3 And Full A B 2 Ex 5 AH Time Cue 0 cept Level as Track Rec Clear Enter Rel Solo Remote Focus Unit O Keypad The keys on the RFU s keypad function exactly like their counterparts on the console O Fader window The top line displays the next cue on the cue list The bottom line displays the cue in the A B fader on the left and the cue in the C D fader on the right Cue channel number window Displays the currently selected cue group or submaster O Keypad prompt window Displays the same prompt that appears in the upper right corner of the Stage or Blind display Power switch Power switch is on in the up position and off in the down position For RFU installation instructions see Appendix A Installation RFU must be turned Off before you install it For instruction on installing a remote monitor see Installing remote video monitors on page 260 To operate your installed RFU move power switch to On The console keypad and RFU are able to operate simultaneously Changes made from both console and RFU are displayed immediately on both con sole monitor and RFU You can control most console functions with RFU you cannot control sub masters however Warning Do not connect or disconnect the RFU when it is turned on cha
9. Cue List Lists all cues along with their attributes The next cue in the cue list is yellow This can be changed from Stage mode but not from Blind Express User Manual Blind The Blind display lets you work on cues without affecting the look on stage O 2 Grandmaster 100 11 56 AM 001 02 03 007 08 09 10 11 12 013 14 15 16 17 18 025 26 27 031 32 33 34 35 36 037 38 39 40 41 42 049 50 51 33 055 56 57 58 59 60 061 62 63 64 65 66 073 74 75 76 079 80 81 82 83 84 085 86 87 88 89 90 Fader A B Fader C D Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate Clear Clear m 3 Curtain up Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate 1 10 X 5 ij 4 Toad exits Z ti 6 1 2 Cue E 4 5 6 Delete 8 Port List Rate Cue Ose Y O Grandmaster Current Grandmaster setting Blackout alert and submaster page Display mode Current display mode and time Keypad corner Indicates how the console will interpret the next number entered from the keypad For example if you press Channel the corner dis plays Chan indicating that the console will read the next number as a channel number If you enter a range only the last number in the range will appear Channel level display Level of channels in the selected cue group or submaster O Fader status Indicates current status of both fader pairs Shows cue running in fader fade times percentage of completion and follow times O Attribute bar Shows current settings for selected
10. Displays Print Functions menu Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all macros or select 1st macro number to print Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR File sent to the printer To print a partial macro list from the Print menu follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press 8 Print Macros Enter Use the keypad to enter the first macro in the range you wish to print Press Enter Use the keypad to enter the last macro in the range you wish to print Press Enter Action Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all macros or select 1st macro number to print Prompt reads Press ENTER to print macro or select last macro number to print File sent to the printer chapter 16 printing Patch 183 Print Patch prints the current dimmer to channel patch To print a full patch report follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 5 Print Functions Enter Press 9 Print Patch Enter Press Enter or press Clear to cancel the print operation Channel Attributes Print Channel Attributes prints a list of channel attributes or a list of Link List links recorded in the currently loaded show Action Displays Setup menu Displays Print Functions menu Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR File sent to the printer To print a full Link List or list of channel attributes follow these steps Keystrokes 1
11. Press Timel Enter an upfade time between 1 second and 99 59 minutes and press Enter If you want a downfade time that is different from the upfade enter the desired time and press Enter If not just press Enter Press Wait Enter wait time and press Enter Wait time is the delay between when you press Go and when the part begins If you do not enter a wait time Express assigns a wait time of zero Action Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Prompt reads Select part number Prompt reads Enter upfade time Prompt reads Enter downfade time Fade times are set for the part Prompt reads Enter wait time Wait time is set for the part chapter 9 playing back cues Express has two timed faders that allow you to play back recorded cues Cue selection and playback can be automated or you can control them manually oOo NO 0000037 O02N0p 00300373 This chapter includes the following sections Selecting cues Timed faders and LED displays Playback Cue List Fader Status display Selecting and playing cues Go to a different cue Controlling fades manually Quickstep Express User Manual Selecting cues There are three ways to determine which cue from the Cue List will play back on stage next e You can select a cue manually e When a cue plays Express automatically selects the next cue e Express a
12. S6 Delete Group 5 Enter Enter deletes group 5 Delete Cue Delete Cue is softkey S6 in the Blind Cue and Blind Subroutine dis plays Press S6 Delete Cue to delete the contents of a selected or specified cue Example S6 Delete Cue 6 Enter Enter deletes cue 6 Example S6 Delete Cue Enter Enter deletes the selected cue Delete Entry Delete Entry is softkey S3 in the Macro Editing display Use S3 Delete Entry to clear a button entry from a macro Use the left and right arrow keys to move to the required entry When selected it will be highlighted in yellow Press S3 to clear the entry Delete Group Delete Group is softkey S6 in the Blind Group displays Press S6 Delete Group to delete the contents of a selected or specified group Example Delete Group 6 Enter Enter deletes group 6 Example Delete Group Enter Enter deletes the selected group Delete Macro Delete Macro is softkey S6 in the Macro Editing display Use S6 Delete Macro to remove all recorded information from a macro Example S6 Delete Macro 3 Enter Enter erases the contents of macro 3 Delete Part Delete Part is softkey S6 in the Blind Multipart display Press S6 Delete Part to delete one part of a selected or specified mul tipart cue Example S6 Delete Part 6 Enter Enter deletes part 6 Example S6 Delete Part Enter Enter deletes the selected part appe
13. Selects Cue 2 3 Press Gol Runs cue 2 4 While cueisrunning press Running cue pauses Hold 5 Press Go Cue resumes 6 Once cue finishes press Previous cue fades up on stage Back Go to a different cue To play back a cue other than the cue highlighted on the Cue List follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage mode display 2 Press Cue 2 Selects cue 2 3 Press Go Runs cue 2 chapter 9 playing back cues 95 Controlling fades manually Express provides two ways to take manual control of cue playback manual override and rate override Manual override Manual override allows you to use the fader sliders to take manual control of fade levels When you take manual control of cue playback moving the fader slider controls the fade Leave the fader sliders at 10 before pressing Go to play cues back as recorded When you move the fader sliders below 10 the cue runs until it reaches the slider setting You can set the slider before you play the cue or move the slider after the fade starts The fade stops when it reaches the slider s level and the slider then controls the fade For example if you set the slid ers at 8 the cue will play until it reaches 80 percent of its recorded levels then give you manual control Set the sliders at 0 before you press Go to take manual control of fade from the beginning of cue Hint If you start a cue and the performers skip ahead to th
14. ber s you wish to add to or update in the cue Press Enter Or Press Track Enter Action Selects Stage display mode Plays back selected cue bringing up its current levels Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER TRACK ENTER for tracking To cancel press clear Prompt reads To update channel s select number s and press ENTER To cancel press clear Updates and re records the active cue Note Press Track instead of Enter in step 7 if you wish changes to track into subsequent cues 66 Express User Manual Using Update to modify fade rate You may also use the Update function to record manually modified fade rates into cues Follow these steps to update a rate for a cue running in a fader Keystrokes Action 1 Press Rate key for the Activates rate control fader in which the cue is running 2 Move rate wheel to adjust Fades are placed under control of fade rate the rate wheel The Fader Status window shows the current rate 3 Press S2 Update Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER TRACK ENTER for tracking Press ONLY ENTER to update only those channels already in cue 4 Press Enter New rate is recorded into cue chapter 6 cues Deleting cues 67 Follow these steps to delete a cue in Stage or Blind mode Keystrokes dle Press Stage or Blind If you press Stage press S7 More Softkeys Press S6 De
15. 11 and 12 respectively Copying cues or groups to submasters To copy a look from a cue or a group to a submaster follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Cue or Group Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE 3 Press 1 Selects cue to copy Corner reads Cue 1 4 Press Record Sub Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press 9 Selects submaster 9 Corner reads Sub 9 6 Press Enter Submaster Contents of cue 1 are copied to copy is complete submaster 9 chapter 11 submasters 133 Clearing submasters You must be in Blind display mode to clear the contents of individual sub masters This process erases all level setting instructions and attributes from the submaster To clear all submasters use the Clear Submasters option from the Clear Functions menu as described in Chapter 18 Clear Functions on page 188 To clear submasters follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display 2 Press Subl Prompt reads Select submaster number 3 Press S6 Delete Sub Prompt reads To delete submaster s select number s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Enter the number of the Corner reads submaster you want to Sub 2 clear 5 Press Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press Enter to delet
16. 2 Press 6 Keypad corner reads Dim 6 3 Press Enter About Dimmer window is dis played About Dimmer 15 Channel 15 Profile 0 Label The dimmer s label Channel The channel to which the dimmer is assigned Proportion The dimmer s assigned proportional level Profile The dimmer s assigned profile Console dimmer level The dimmer output level the Express console is sending to the dimmer e Parked Whether or not the dimmer is parked Note Press Clear to remove the About window Express User Manual About Dimmer with ETCLink If your console uses ETCLink to monitor dimmers in an ETC Sensor dim ming system the About Dimmer window displays additional dimmer monitoring information The following expanded About Dimmer window appears if dimmer monitoring is enabled About Dimmer 2 e Label The dimmer s label e Channel The channel to which the dimmer is assigned e Proportion The dimmer s assigned proportional level e Profile The dimmer s assigned profile e Console dimmer level The dimmer output level the Express console is sending to the dimmer e Parked Whether or not the dimmer is parked e Rack Slot number The rack and slot in which this dimmer is located e Rack dimmer level The actual output level at which the dimmer is set e Dimmer level source The source of the control signal which set the dimmer s level Possible sources include DMX A DMX B Rack The following informati
17. 60 281 299 Follow time 154 Format diskette 171 Full 42 281 G Go 94 281 Group 99 237 282 Blind 103 Clear all 188 Copy 110 Copy to sub 132 Create 100 Create w Solo 101 Delete 109 Displaying 102 Group Editing mode 103 104 282 Group List 114 282 Group mode 103 282 Load to sub 132 Modify cue or sub 112 Modifying 105 Only 113 Print 178 Print group list 180 Range edit in Group List 71 Update 107 Use cue or sub 111 H Help 4 282 Hide Labels 294 High levels 138 Highest level 4 Hold 94 282 Hold for Go subroutine 153 283 Home position 116 l In 138 In time 138 In Dwell Out 283 Independent 37 38 230 283 Independent channels 283 Inhibitive submaster 116 127 283 Input Output configuration 247 Insert Cue 69 Insert Link 238 Insert Step 284 Inserting cues 78 Insert Replace 284 292 Installation 243 Dimmers 246 index ETCNet 253 MIDI 252 Printer 250 Remote Interface 254 Remote macro 261 Remote monitors 260 Remote Video Interface 256 RFU 251 Italic 4 J Jump to cue 153 284 K Keypad Numbers 284 Keys About 31 45 Back 94 Clear 91 Except 40 280 Follow 59 Full 42 Go 94 Group 111 Hold 94 Learn 160 Level 42 Link 58 Only 113 237 Rate 96 Solo 62 101 Sub Page 118 Type 117 L Label 37 Last Page 284 Learn 284 Learn Macro 284 Macro 160 LEDs Faders 91 Submaster 119 Left Arrow 284 Level 42 154 285 Default Level 16 Lighting Playback Controller 226 Link 58 60
18. 61 285 Creating 232 Delete 241 Insert 238 Macro to macro 163 Merge 240 Move 239 Using 233 313 314 Link List 229 230 234 List Cue List 70 92 Group List 114 Link List 229 230 Submaster List 134 135 Load 285 Cue or group to sub 132 Effects 150 Errors 204 Load Check 202 285 Loop 153 Loop subroutine 285 Low levels 138 Low High Levels 285 LPC 226 M M 286 M1 M5 285 Macro 159 286 Cancel 165 Clear 166 Clear all 190 Copy 167 Creating 160 Display mode 161 Edit 166 Learn 160 284 Link to cue 61 Link to macro 163 M 286 M1 M5 285 Macro Wait 162 286 Macro wait 286 Modify 166 Play 165 Print 182 Remote 261 Remote macros 226 Samples 168 Specifications 269 Submasters in 164 Manual 286 Override cue 95 Override submaster fade 130 Memory 5 Menu Clear Functions 186 Diskette Functions 169 ETCLink Functions 197 198 212 Print Functions 176 Setup 294 System settings 13 MIDI 214 Express User Manual index Configuring ETC MIDI 215 ETC MIDI 214 ETC MIDI message formats 215 216 Installation 252 Message definitions 217 Pinout 252 MIDI Show Control 214 218 Configuring 219 Disable 219 Fire 219 Go 219 Resume 219 Stop 219 Minus 286 Modify Channel 87 Cue attributes 63 Cues 63 Effect 147 Groups 105 With Group 107 Macro 166 Multipart fade time 88 Multipart wait time 88 Submaster 128 Modifying Submasters 128 Monitor Connectors 260 Pinout 260 Remote video 260 Move Link 239 Moving channels
19. 69 You may want to insert a cue between recorded cues For example you may want to modify cue 1 slightly and insert it between cues 1 and 2 You can number cues with a one digit decimal Therefore you can insert up to nine cues between 1 and 2 1 1 1 2 etc Follow these steps to insert a cue between existing cues Keystrokes 1 2 Press Blind or Stage Press Cue and enter the number of the cue to mod ify then press Enter If you are working in Stage mode press Go Add or modify channels and cue attributes Press Record Enter cue number with a decimal to insert it between cues e g 1 1 115 If you do not enter anew cue number you will overwrite the existing cue Press Enter Action Selects display mode Selects the desired cue Brings up cue on stage and on the display Cue is modified Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Cue 1 5 New cue 1 5 is recorded between cues 1 and 2 Express User Manual Cue List The Blind Cue List displays a list of the cues in your show Up to 18 cues are displayed on screen at any time The Cue List includes the cue number and type its upfade downfade and wait times its link and follow settings its rate and its label Press S2 Cue List in Blind mode to display the Cue List A sample Cue List display is shown below 01 00 PM Link Cue Type 1 Up Down
20. Change downfade only 145 Follow these steps to change only the effect s downfade time Keystrokes 1 2 3 Press Blind Cue 2 Press Time Time Time Enter the downfade time 4 Press Enter Change dwell only Follow these steps to change only the effect s dwell time Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Cue 2 2 Press Time Time 3 Enter the dwell time 4 Press Enter Enter Reset Hold dwell time Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Enter effect downfade time Prompt reads Enter effect downfade time Prompt reads Select step numbers Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Enter effect dwell time Prompt reads Enter effect dwell time Prompt reads Select step numbers If the dwell time is set to Hold an effect submaster will continue to run until you press the bump button An effect cue will continue to run until you press either Go or Hold Hold To reset the dwell time to Hold follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Ze Press Blind Cue 2 Press Time Time Press Clear Press Enter Enter Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Enter effect dwell time Prompt reads Enter effect dwell time Dwell time set to Hold Prompt reads Select step numbers Express User Manual Using a random rate An effect with a random rate runs at varying speeds changing at rando
21. DIAM EStdt See seaweeds Se eos Se a 207 Setting and unsetting dimmers 0 0 00 ce eee eee 208 Setting FAm sre Pea wwe ta en bee Veen Ae ae se 208 UNnsSetting a dimmer sre anid ee eek eee epee aes 208 Working with Sensor backup looks oo o oooooo ae 209 Recording a backup look 000222000005 209 Playing a backup l00k ooooooooooooocoo o 210 Erronmessages at dd 211 Disabling secondary messages ooooooococcc 212 Chapter 20 Control interfaces 22 35 084809 ii ht bes PAG eRe 213 MID Loa tae at tisha acer SR ite Nita A Cate wa BEA dana 214 BECIMID Ms 2 a caithenl a nea eet at eee Aad 214 MIDI Show Control MSC 20 ee 218 Real time Clocks 0th acs od ea ae Ou SRG Ea ah eee eee 222 REMOTE MACOS ita Ane aS ees PR aoe eG 226 Remote MITE tart te o he ih cae be 227 Chapter 21 Moving lIGhtS ooo 229 Link LIST OVEIVIEWSs masti 226 rar dt pat nad nae wae oda wk 230 Trackpad MOJE Sra sea a eee Pe es 231 SPOE moderner a Ase a eee ate eae OY ae eae 231 Double MODs entras ee EE Sea Re es ON a 231 AMOO La Sere na ed kh pelea Ai tol hake i i 231 Traekpad notes 25 0404 a Son ae ee dod 231 setting UP AIM Gig Sacre arse OO ee Re Ee ee ee 232 USING INK ov taa Aa a aa Seas eee SEA Ae ee Gee Ba 233 Linking two moving lightS 00000000 0c eee eee 234 Flipped channels n onanan 00000 tees 235 Mirroring two moving lights 20 2000020 eee eee 235 Using groups and Only wit
22. Enable 0 Disable Corner reads Flexi 1 Or Flexi 0 Flexichannel mode is enabled or disabled When channels that were used in a show are removed from the show they remain on the channel list until it is updated The Purge Flexi softkey on the System Settings display updates the list of used channels The list is also updated when you load a show from diskette or when you first turn Flexichannel on Press Setup 1 Enter S1 Purge Flexi to update Flexichannel displays chapter 3 system settings Set Master type You may set the Master slider to one of three control options e Disabled Master slider does nothing e Grandmaster Master slider controls all levels on stage except parked channels and independent channels e Sub Grandmaster Master slider controls all levels on stage set by submasters To configure your Master slider follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 System Settings Enter 3 Press 1 0 Master Type Enter 4 Press 1 Enter Action Displays Setup menu Displays System Settings menu Prompt reads Select master type and press ENTER 0 Disabled 1 Grandmaster 2 Sub Grandmaster Master is set as Grandmaster Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 sets your console s channels to a one to one match with your submasters Thus channel 1 is patched to submas ter 1 channel 2 to submaster 2 and
23. If you enter elements without using And or Except the channels or groups you enter replace the current element list Deleting elements To remove a channel or group from a step follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Blind Cue 2 Select the step you wish to modify using J and T or press S1 Step and enter the step number Press Enter Exceptl Enter the channel or group number to remove Press Enter Press Record Enter Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Select step numbers Prompt reads Select channel numbers Pre cede with AND to add to exist ing step or EXCEPT to delete from step Prompt reads Select channel numbers Prompt reads Select step numbers Records your changes to the cue 150 Express User Manual Running an effect cue Play back effects recorded as cues on the console s A B or C D faders just as you would any other cue The effect will run using the cue s Up Dwell and Down times to determine how long the cue lasts To run the cue press Cue enter the effect cue number and press Go An effect cue with a Hold dwell time runs on the fader until you press that fader s Clear key to begin the downfade Press Clear once to fade out an effect cue in the recorded downfade time You may use the playback sliders to manually control the cue allowing you to fade the effect up and down with the playback slider Note P
24. Link Normally pressing Go plays back cues in the sequence indicated on the Cue List Link allows you to play back cues out of sequence by linking them together For example if you link cue 6 to cue 2 then play cue 6 pressing Go plays cue 2 Follow these steps to record a linked cue Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage or Blind Selects display mode 2 Cue 6 Selects cue 6 3 Press Link Prompt reads To link to cue select cue number To link to macro press ENTER MACRO 4 Press 2 Enter Links cue 6 to cue 2 After you play back cue 6 press Go to play back cue 2 Note You can also link cues to macros For more information on linking cues to macros see page 163 in Chapter 15 Working with macros chapter 6 cues 59 Follow Follow allows you to play a series of cues automatically The Follow time indicates how long the console waits after the cue starts before the next cue runs Follow plays back the next cue on the Cue List unless you use Link to specify a different sequence Follow times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds up to 99 59 minutes Follow these steps to record a cue with Follow Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage or Blind Selects display mode 2 Press Cue 7 Selects cue 7 3 Press S5 Follow Prompt reads Enter follow time or press ENTER to confirm default time 4 Press 5 Enter Records cue 7 with a Follow time o
25. Modify channel levels as desired Press S2 Update If you wish to update the levels in a cue other than the active cue enter the desired cue number To record changes only to channels that are already in the cue press S4 Only Press Enter O a Press Track Enter Action Selects Stage display mode Plays back selected cue bringing up its current levels Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER TRACK ENTER for tracking Press ONLY ENTER to update only those channels already in cue Limits update to channels in cue Updates and re records the active cue Note Press Track after you press S2 Update if you wish changes to track into subsequent cues chapter 6 cues 65 Using Update to add channels to a cue Normally when you re record a cue you record all the channel levels cur rently on stage Express s Update feature allows you to record only those channels that you specify This allows you to add specific channels to the active cue then re record the cue without recording the entire stage look Follow these steps to use Update to modify a cue in Stage mode Keystrokes 1 Zi Press Stage Press Cue enter cue number and press Go Modify or add channel levels as desired Press S2 Update If you wish to update the levels in a cue other than the active cue enter the desired cue number Press Channel Enter the channel num
26. S1 in the Patch display S1 Multiplex allows a range of dimmers to be used with ETC Source 4 multiplexers A and B outputs will be created for each multiplex dimmer which may be patched to discrete control channels Multiplex assign ments may be given only to dimmers on a DMX512 port that has been set for multiplex in the I O Configuration menu Next Page Next Page is softkey S5 in many displays Press S5 Next Page to go forward one display page Off Sub Bump Off Sub Bump is softkey S5 in the Macro Editing displays Use S5 Off Sub Bump in a macro instruction to force the submaster off via the submaster bump button The downfade will occur in the down fade time for that bump button Use the actual submaster bump button or the keypad when recording the macro Example Select Macro 5 Enter S5 Off Sub Bump Submaster 1 s bump button Enter Macro creates a macro that down fades submaster 1 288 Express User Manual On Sub Bump On Sub Bump is softkey S4 in the Macro Editing display Use S4 On Sub Bump in a macro instruction to force the submaster on via the submaster bump button The upfade will occur in the upfade time for that bump button Use the actual submaster bump button or the keypad when recording the macro The submaster will fade out after the dwell time has elapsed unless it is programmed with a hold Only Use Only to select a subset of the currently selected channels Example G
27. channels or groups to each step in turn i e channel 1 to step 1 channel 2 to step 2 and so on If there are more elements than steps Express assigns an element to each step then returns to the first step and continues assigning elements one per step until all are assigned Follow these steps to create an effect that uses a one to one channel assignment In the example channels 1 through 22 are assigned to steps 1 through 10 creating a ten step effect Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Type 3 and designates it as an effect cue 2 Press S1 Step andenter Prompt reads 1 Thru 1 0 Select step numbers 3 Press Enter Prompt reads Select channel numbers 4 Press 1 Thru 2 2 the Prompt reads range of channels to Select channel numbers assign to the steps 5 Press Enter Channels are assigned to steps as indicated above see chart below Step number Contains channels Step 1 1 11 21 Step 2 2 12 22 Step 3 3 13 Step 4 4 14 Step 5 5 15 Step 6 6 16 Step 7 7 17 Step 8 8 18 Step 9 9 19 Step 10 10 20 Express User Manual Controlling effects Effect steps are controlled by assigned attributes fade times and rates In addition the cue or submaster containing the effect may be assigned fade times and rates that apply to the effect overall Attributes Attributes control how the effect plays its steps Press S7 More Soft keys S8
28. or 10 Dimmer at full whenever console power is on Affected by Blackout but not by Grandmaster chapter 4 patch 29 Capturing channels in Patch Express lets you select and capture channels without returning to Stage mode This allows you to bring channels up on stage to view the propor tional settings of dimmers assigned to a channel while you set them To select channels from the patch screen follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Patch 2 Press Channel 3 Use the keypad to enter the desired channel num ber s Use And and Thru if you want to select more than one channel 4 Press Full to set channel level at 100 percent Level to set channel at the default level or press At and enter a level set ting 5 Press Rel to release channel s Action Selects Patch display Prompt reads Select channel numbers Prompt reads Select channel numbers Selected channels are set at the indicated level Express User Manual Dimmer check A dimmer check allows you to raise your dimmers to a specified level on stage one ata time Express allows you to select the starting dimmer and set it at a level Once you select the dimmer use to check each con secutive dimmer Follow these steps to run a dimmer check Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Dim Prompt reads Enter dimmer number s then press AT to select level 2 Press 1 to start dimmer Keypad corner reads check with
29. 04 05 06 Group 2 contains all channels for fixture 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 Group 3 contains all channels for fixture 3 21 22 23 24 25 26 Group 4 contains all channels for fixture 4 31 32 33 34 35 36 Next you create a set of groups that each contain all the channels that con trol one parameter for your moving lights Group 5 contains all pan controlling channels 01 11 21 31 Group 6 contains all tilt controlling channels 02 12 22 32 Group 7 contains all level controlling channels 03 13 23 33 Now say you wish to change the level for fixtures 1 and 3 The following keystrokes would select only the appropriate channels Group 1 Ana 3 54 Only Group 7 This selects groups 1 and 3 which correspond to fixtures 1 and 3 then selects only the channels in those groups which are also in Group 7 the level group 3 and 23 You may now press At 7 5 to set the levels of the two fixtures at 75 percent 114 Express User Manual Group List Press Blind Group Enter S2 Group List to display the Group List The Group List displays the group number and label of all recorded groups Up to 38 groups may be displayed at a time Use S4 Previous Page and S5 Next Page to move forward and backward from page to page or use and to scroll through the groups The selected group is displayed in white and the selected field is highlighted in yellow other groups are dis played in gray 01 01 PM Label G
30. 10 would constitute ten elements filling the step However a group containing channels 1 through 10 would constitute only one element allowing nine more chan nels or groups to be added Each step in an effect is assigned a high and low level a step time and an in dwell and out time Step time Step time is the time between the beginning of a step and the beginning of the next step Default Step time is 0 2 seconds In time In a positive effect the time the step takes to fade from its starting level to its high level is the In time In a negative effect it is the time it takes to fade from its starting level to its low level Default In time is zero seconds Dwell time Dwell time is the length of time between the end of the In fade and the start of the Out fade Default Dwell time is zero Out time In a positive effect the time the step takes to fade from its high level to its low level is the Out time In a negative effect it is the time it takes the step to fade from its low level to its high level Default Out time is zero seconds Note If the In Dwell Out times are 0 0 0 the step will rise instantly to its High level and remain there until the Step time has elapsed Then it will drop instantly to its Low level High and Low levels The High and Low levels represent the range of levels channels in the step are allowed to reach Default High level is Full default Low level is zero Note If you create an effect step
31. 127 Controller change 77 parameters 1 127 Cues 128 255 Controller change 78 parameters 0 127 Cues 256 383 Cues 384 511 Cues 512 639 Cues 640 767 Cues 768 895 Cues 896 999 Macro execution Macros 1 127 Macros 128 255 Macros 256 383 Macros 384 511 Macros 512 639 Macros 640 767 Macros 768 895 Macros 896 999 Control Control Control Control Control Control Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro er change 79 er change 80 er change 81 er change 82 er change 83 er change 84 er change 85 ler change 86 ler change 87 ler change 88 ler change 89 ler change 90 ler change 91 ler change 92 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 103 parameters 1 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 103 218 Express User Manual MIDI Show Control MSC The consoles recognize the following MSC commands e Go e Stop e Resume e Fire The consoles ignore all other commands The commands can be received and or transmitted chapter 20 control interfaces 219 Configuring MIDI Show Control Each device receiving MIDI Show Control information must be assigned a device ID Express can receive MSC information transmit MSC informa tion or both To enable input and or output of
32. 154 Creating Subroutines enn pow bad oa Pew Se REE eee e 155 Editing a subroutine o 157 Deleting astep 2 ee 157 EUA be ks on le ie etd 157 Chapter 14 Macros 02 he esos LO a Spe aad Benes Ded 159 Creating MACTOS rasimni oe aig eh ee Ate Ken ee a 160 USING bean senak ee Feared an ee be eet ep ee ne 160 Using Macro display mode 0000 ce eee eee 161 Next MaC Onde cita hos war de ia nde a hand aided ae eS 162 Macro Walton a dates ne bd 162 LINKING macros fueras ete Hee ayer aa Oe ed Bee 163 Using submasters IN Macros 0000 cee ees 164 Playing MacOS Lara aed gon ted aga oa dab hada oaths 165 Canceling amaci On otre eee 165 Power p macro etica bd Boop che ta ET 165 MOdifViNGiiMaGrGs roh eana aE PES DINE EOT E AAEN EEIN 166 CIBariMng Macros rematan pla r taht ed tanned bed ao 166 Copying MaOs esner ae ea See wee E aa Wee OES 167 Sampe MacOS eet e o als eee ie da da 168 6 Express User Manual Chapter 15 Diskette functions Laaa 169 Diskette management o 170 Formatting diskettes cio nos aos pede aso eee e 171 Recording a show on diskette 0 00 0 ccc ee eee 172 Reading a show from diskette 0 0 0 0000 eee eee 173 Chapter 16 PEEING ona eps Peet ht OO Ad Seri Mintel ick ee Re BRL 175 PRINTEMOPTION S228 48 e eh pios 2a edd 176 Stage display iaa a os e a a e a al 176 CUINA E lo 177 IU PS a E de anal aimed oth one dd 178 SUBS TS Sito Bind of Pn e yl a o di 179 CUS LISE
33. 187 189 Show Labels 294 Show Suppress Labels 27 SMPTE Clear all 191 Print 184 Sneak 43 294 Default time 17 Softkeys 301 Delete Link 241 Flash 42 Flip 235 Express User Manual index Insert Link 238 Move Link 239 Quickstep 97 Select Group 104 Unload sub 133 Update 64 65 107 129 Solo 62 294 Solo record 101 Sort 295 Specifications 267 269 Split fade 56 Stage 51 295 Stage display 9 Print 176 Step 138 295 Creating 139 Delete 148 Editing characteristics 148 Effect 295 Element 141 Insert 147 Step Time 295 Subroutine 152 295 Time 138 Steps 138 Stop Printer 296 Strand CD80 34 Style 153 296 Style steps Subroutine 296 Sub 296 Sub List 296 Submaster 115 296 Bump buttons 121 297 Changing shows 118 Changing type 117 Clear 133 Clear all 188 Copy 131 132 Copy cue or group 132 Copy to other page 130 Default match to channels 19 Dwell times 121 Hold 123 Manual 124 286 Effect 116 150 Except 126 Fade times 121 122 130 Home position 116 In macros 164 Inhibitive 116 127 283 LEDs 118 119 127 List 130 134 Live edit 128 Load cue or group 132 Load effect 150 319 320 Express User Manual Manual control 130 Manual fade 130 Manual time 124 Modifying 128 Override fade time 130 Pages 118 125 Pile on 116 Print 179 Print submaster list 181 Range edit in Submaster List 135 Rate 125 130 291 Record 121 Recording 125 Sliders 130 150 Specifications 268 Submaster display edit 128 Su
34. 2 Press Setup Selects Setup display 3 Press 3 Disk Functions Selects Diskette Functions Enter menu 4 Press 2 Read Show The following screen appears from Disk Enter Show information is displayed including show name date recorded etc 5 Press Enter or press Message appears on screen Clear to cancel the opera From disk in progress Mes tion sage remains until show is loaded 174 Express User Manual chapter 16 Printing Express supports parallel printers including some laser printers Printer installation is described on page 250 of Appendix A Installation This chap ter includes instructions for using Express s print options Each of the fol lowing printouts is explained and illustrated on the following pages e Stage display e Cues e Groups e Submasters e Cue list e Group list e Submaster list e Macros e Patch e Channel attributes e Real Time Programs 176 Express User Manual Printer options Before you begin printing verify that your printer is installed correctly and that it is turned on For instructions on installing printers see Appendix A Installation All print options are located on the Print Functions menu To display the menu press Setup then select 5 Print Functions and press Enter Express displays the Print Functions menu illustrated below Print Functions 11 00 AM Print Stage Display Print Cues Print Groups Print Submasters Print C
35. 36 287 Moving lights 113 229 234 235 MSC 214 218 Multipart cue 83 287 Converting regular cue to 85 Creating 84 Definition 287 Delete part 86 Editing channels 86 Modify channels 87 Wait time 86 Multiplex 205 248 287 Multiplex dimming technology 33 Multiplexed dimmers 33 247 Multiplexer 33 Musical Instrument Digital Interface 214 N Next Page 8 O Off Sub Bump 164 287 On Sub Bump 164 288 315 316 One to one patch 24 Only 113 237 288 Optional equipment Remote Focus Unit 251 Out 138 283 Out time 138 Output configuration 247 Output level conventions 4 P Page 8 118 288 Submasters 118 125 Pan 234 Parts 83 287 288 Patch 23 288 Captured channels 29 Clear 189 190 Custom 24 Dimmers 25 Display 12 288 Multiplex 33 Print 183 Proportional patch 26 Reset 190 Pause Printer 289 Pile on submaster 116 289 Pinout Dimmer 246 MIDI 252 Monitor 260 Printer 250 Remote macros 261 RFU 251 Play Backup 289 Playback Cues 89 Display 92 Macro 165 Monitor 275 280 Specifications 267 Plus 289 Positive Negative 289 Previous 289 Previous Page 8 289 Print 175 Cancel printer 176 Channel Attributes 183 Cue list 180 Cues 177 Group list 180 Groups 178 Load Errors 204 Macro 182 Options 176 Patch 183 Express User Manual index Pause printer 176 Print Screen 289 Printer 250 SMPTE 184 Stage display 176 Submaster list 181 Submasters 179 Profile 289 Assign to dimmer 28 Dimmer 28 Spe
36. 5 Step 6 becomes step 5 step 7 becomes step 6 and so on Prompt reads Select step numbers Records your changes to the cue Editing step characteristics Use the arrow keys to select step characteristics to edit For example to edit a step s In time follow these instructions Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Cue 2 2 Use J to select the step you want to edit for exam ple step 2 or Press S1 Step 2 3 Use gt to highlight the In time field in step 2 Or Press S7 More Soft keys S3 In Dwell Out 4 Press 8 the new In time Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Select step numbers Prompt reads Enter step in time New step time is added chapter 12 effects Adding elements To add a channel or group to a step follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 6 Press Blind Cue 2 Select the step you wish to modify using J and T or press S1 Step and enter the step number Press Enter And Enter the channel or group number to add Press Enter Press Record Enter 149 Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Select step numbers Prompt reads Select channel numbers Precede with AND to add to existing step or EXCEPT to delete from step Prompt reads Select channel numbers Channel 7 is added to element list Prompt reads Select step numbers Records your changes to the cue Note
37. 6 12 Vdc fused 2 amp 252 Express User Manual Installing MIDI Connect Express to any MIDI equipment using a standard MIDI cable There are three round 5 pin DIN type connectors labeled MIDI In MIDI Out and MIDI Thru on the back of the console Turn console power off then connect the cable from the MIDI Out of the electronic instrument or sequencer to the MIDI In on the console Connect the cable from the MIDI In on the instrument or sequencer to the connector labeled MIDI Out Follow these steps to connect MIDI equipment to Express 1 Turn console power off 2 Insert standard MIDI cable into the connector on the back of the con sole labeled MIDI In 3 If you are sending MIDI commands from the console insert another standard MIDI cable into the connector on the back of the console labeled MIDI Out MIDI console connectors DIN 5 pin female MIDI pinout not connected Ground not connected MIDI MIDI aOBRWN appendix a installation 253 ETCNet Express supports ETCNet a specially designed network that allows you to connect a wide variety of ETC interface devices to the console at remote locations Through these devices you can attach monitors DMX512 devices RFUs and alphanumeric keyboards to the network Interface devices include the Remote Interface and the Remote Video interface ETCNet connectors for wiring are located on the back panel of the console and all ETCNet interface devices The conne
38. Attribute to reveal the attribute softkeys Assign attributes using the following rules e All effects are either Positive or Negative When you initially create an effect it defaults to Positive e Alternate Reverse Bounce and Build can be applied in any combina tion to a Positive or Negative effect e Random can be applied to any Positive or Negative effect Random may not be combined with Alternate Reverse Bounce or Build Note In the following descriptions On means elements are set to their high level Off means they are set to their low level S1 Positive In a positive effect all elements start Off Each step turns its assigned ele ments On and the previous step s elements Off S1 Negative In a negative effect all elements start On Each step turns its assigned elements Off and the previous step s elements On Note S1 Positive Negative switches back and forth between positive and negative S2 Alternate The effect alternates between positive and negative chases through the steps The first pass is positive if the effect is positive negative if the effect is negative S3 Reverse Steps run in reverse numerical order S4 Bounce Steps run first in forward then in reverse order Subsequent passes alter nate between forward and reverse S5 Build All elements are Off at the beginning of the chase Each step turns its assigned elements On and leaves the previous step On At th
39. Blind 53 Cue List 70 Display 10 273 Multipart cues 86 Record cue 54 Boldface 4 Bounce effect 273 Bounce subroutine 153 273 Brackets 4 Build 273 Bump buttons 120 Bump Status 273 Cc Cancel 274 Captured channels 29 36 274 CD80 34 306 Express User Manual Changing pages 8 Channel 274 Captured 36 Captured in Patch 29 Channel Attributes display 37 Channel Check 44 Channel levels 35 Color 8 Flash 42 280 Flip 235 Flipped 39 Full 42 Groups 99 112 Independent 38 Levels 42 Match to submasters 19 Modes 36 Moving 36 Print channel attributes 183 Recorded 36 Selected 36 Selecting channels 40 Setting number 14 Sneak 43 Specifications 268 System settings 14 Tracked 36 Update cue 64 65 Channel attributes Channel Attributes display 230 Clear all 191 Check Channel check 44 Cue check 97 Dimmer check 30 Dimmer loads 201 Circuit board Node Revision A 257 Clear 185 274 Channel Attributes 191 Clear fader 274 Clear keypad 274 Clear Functions menu 186 Clear Loads 274 Cues 187 Fader 91 Functions 186 Groups 109 188 Loads 203 Macros 166 190 276 Patch 190 Reset system 192 Show 187 Show and Patch 189 SMPTE events 191 index Submasters 133 188 Clock 20 22 Color scrollers 232 Colors Channel 8 LEDs 119 Submasters 70 134 Connectors Dimmer 246 Monitor 260 Printer 250 RFU 251 Copy Copy Macro 274 Cue or group to sub 132 Cues 68 Group 110 Macro 167 Submaster to other page 13
40. ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press 9 Enter Link 6 is renumbered as link 9 Note If you move a link to a space on the Link List which already contains a link the channels in the moved link are added to the existing link See Merging two links on page 240 for more information 240 Merging two links Express User Manual If you move a link to a space on the Link List which already contains a link the channels in the moved link are added to the existing link To move a link to an occupied space on the Link List follow these steps Keystrokes 1 w 4 Press Setup 1 1 Enter Press S7 Link List Press S7 Move Link Press 6 Enter Press 7 Enter Press Enter Action Selects Channel Attributes display Selects Link List display Prompt reads Select link number Prompt reads Select link number s to move then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Prompt reads To move selected link s select target link and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Prompt reads Link already exists To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR The channels in link 6 are added to the channels in link 7 Note To split a link apart create a new link with the channels you want to move Since a channel can only be in one link at a time it will be deleted from the original link and recorded in the new link chapter 21 moving lights 241 Deleting a link Use S6 Delete Link t
41. Enter or press Clear to cancel the print operation Action Displays Setup menu Displays Print Functions menu Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all cues or select 1st cue number to print Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR File sent to the printer To print a partial list of cues from the Print menu follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press 2 Print Cues Enter Use the keypad to enter the first cue in the range you wish to print Press Enter Use the keypad to enter the last cue in the range you wish to print Press Enter Action Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all cues or select 1st cue number to print Prompt reads Press ENTER to print cue or select last cue number to print File sent to the printer 178 Groups Express User Manual Print Groups prints a list of groups recorded in the currently loaded show Groups are listed by number Information provided includes the group s label and the levels of all channels included in each group To print a full list of groups follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 5 Print Functions Enter Press 3 Print Groups Enter Press Enter Press Enter or press Clear to cancel the print operation Action Displays Setup menu Displays Print Functions menu Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all groups or select 1st group number to print Prompt
42. Enter days of week 1 Mon 2 Tue 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat 7 Sun Enters days to run macro Prompt reads Enter macro number Creates real time program 1 Macro 5 will run at 8 AM every Monday Wednesday Thursday and Friday 224 Express User Manual Editing real time programs Once you have created a real time program you can easily make changes in the Real Time Programs display Press lt gt T or N to move the highlight When you reach the right end of a line press gt to move to the next line When you reach the last line press J and enter a time to add a new program Deleting real time programs To delete real time programs follow these steps Note The Clear Real Time Programs menu option on the Clear menu allows you to delete all recorded programs Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display mode 2 Press 1 2 Enter Selects Real Time Programs display 3 Press S6 Delete Prompt reads Program Select program number s to delete then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 5 And 6 Enter Selects programs 5 and 6 to delete Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press Enter Deletes programs 5 and 6 Inserting real time programs Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display mode 2 Press 1 2 Enter Selects Real Time Programs display 3 Press S7 More Prompt reads Softkeys S1 Insert Select program numb
43. Functions menu erases information regarding an Express function from the console s memory If that information is saved in a show on a diskette it can be restored to the console Otherwise the information is lost permanently Warning Be certain to save your shows on disk before erasing informa tion you may need in the future See Chapter 16 Diskette functions for information about saving shows All clear options are located on the Clear Functions menu To display the menu press Setup then select 4 Clear Functions and press Enter Express displays the Clear Functions menu illustrated below Clear Functions 11 00 AM Show Cues Groups Submas ters Show and Patch Macros Patch 1 to 1 Channel Attributes Real Time Programs 1 Reset 2 13 4 s 6 B System Return chapter 17 clear functions Show Cues 187 Clear Show erases all information associated with a specific show from your console s memory This does not include patch information or system configuration information To erase a full show follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 4 Clear Func tions Enter Press 1 Clear Show Enter Press Enter Action Displays Setup menu Displays Clear Functions menu Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER Prompt reads To clear show data press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Show cleared Returns to Stage display mode Clear Cues eras
44. Go You may use a wait time to delay the start of the upfade or downfade Use Cue to select a cue number Example Cue 156 1 selects cue 156 1 Cue List The Cue List appears on the display The Cue List provides a list of cues for the show including all of the cues programmed attributes In addition the playback display provides information about which cue is active or run ning and on which fader the cue is running Cue List Cue List is softkey S2 in the Blind Cue and Blind Subroutine displays Use S2 Cue List to access the Cue List display which provides a list of recorded cues and cue attributes Cue steps subroutine There are two types of cue step crossfade and allfade The type deter mines how the step s fade runs Crossfade Allincreasing levels fade during the upfade time all decreasing levels fade during the downfade time Allfade All channels in both faders fade to the level set in the allfade step Decimal point Use the decimal point to select decimal cue numbers 1 9 or decimal fade times Example Cue 5 1 Time 5 Enter sets the fade time for cue 5 1 to half a second 276 Express User Manual Delete Delete is softkey S6 after S7 More Softkeys in the Stage displays Use S6 Delete to delete the contents of a cue or group The keypad assumes a cue unless otherwise instructed Example S6 Delete 6 Enter Enter deletes cue 6 Example
45. Independent channels are not affected by the Grandmaster Blackout Solo or Flash Independent channels An independent channel is not affected by the Grandmaster Blackout Solo or Flash keys Otherwise independent channels function normally You may set a channel as independent in the Link List display Press Rell three times to release independent channels Inhibitive submaster Inhibitive submasters allow you to limit the intensity level for a group of channels An inhibitive submaster doesn t actually set channel levels it prevents channel outputs from exceeding a specified level When an inhibitive submaster is set at 10 100 percent channel output is not inhib ited As you pull the slider down channel outputs are limited to the level at which you set the slider An inhibitive submaster controls the levels of its assigned channels in the same way the Grandmaster controls the levels of all channels Remember leave inhibitive submasters at 10 100 percent unless you want to inhibit channels Otherwise channels may be missing from your cues If channels are missing or channel levels have changed check your inhibitive submasters If a channel is fully inhibited by a submaster its level will be displayed as a yellow zero 284 Express User Manual Insert Replace Insert Replace is softkey S2 in the Macro Editing displays Press S2 Insert Replace to change the editing mode of the macro dis play Replace Mode overwrit
46. Multiplex mode or 0 to set the port for normal mode 6 Press Enter twice to confirm your choice 7 Console indicates mode as either Normal or Multiplex Note If you use multiplexed fixtures you cannot set the ports starting DMX512 numbers Setting DMX512 speed If your console is controlling a dimming system that requires a slower DMX512 signal specify this in the I O Configuration screen Express is designed to run at the highest rate provided for in DMX512 specifications Some dimming systems including some Colortran ENR dimmers may require a signal slower than the full DMX512 specification If this proves necessary you may reset the console s signal speed Speed choices are Slow Medium Fast and Max Express normally runs at Max If you have problems with outputs flashing fades not running smoothly or unselected dimmers rising spontaneously experiment with slower speeds until the symptoms disappear If the symptoms persist please contact ETC Technical Services at 800 775 4382 To reset Express s DMX512 signal speed follow these steps 1 Press Setup to display the Setup Menu 2 Select 2 Input Output Configuration and press Enter 3 Press S4 DMX512 Speed 4 Press 0 for Max 1 for Fast 2 for Medium or 3 for Slow The speed you choose appears in the upper right corner of the display 5 Press Enter to confirm your choice 6 Display indicates new speed setting appendix a insta
47. Press Time Prompt reads Enter upfade time 5 Press 8 Enters a fade time of 8 seconds Corner reads UpTime 8 Press Enter Enter Enters matching downfade time Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 8 Press Enter Records cue 3 with fade time of 8 seconds Note If the cue already exists you may omit steps 7 and 8 56 Express User Manual Recording a cue with split fade times Express allows you to record cues with different upfade and downfade times These cues are said to have split fade times On the Express dis play the time to the left of the refers to the upfade time the number to the right refers to the downfade time Follow these steps to record a cue with split upfade and downfade times Keystrokes 1 2 Press Stage or Blind Press Cue Press 4 Press Timel Press 1 0 Press Enter Press 1 5 Press Record Press Enter Action Selects display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Selects cue 4 Corner reads Cue 4 Prompt reads Enter upfade time Enters an upfade time of ten seconds Corner reads UpTime 10 Prompt reads Enter downfade time Enters a downfade time of 15 seconds Corner reads DnTime 15 Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Records cue 4 with upfade time of 10 seconds and downfade tim
48. Selects Channel Attributes display 2 Press S7 Link List Selects Link List display Prompt reads Select link number w Press 2 Enter Selects link 2 Prompt reads Select X channel number s Precede with AND to add to existing link or EXCEPT to delete from link 4 Press 2 And 11121 gt The pan control channels are assigned to the link s X list Prompt reads Select Y channel number Pre cede with AND to add to exist ing link or EXCEPT to delete from link 5 Press 3 And 11131 gt The tilt control channels are assigned to the link s Y list Prompt reads Select fixture type then press ENTER 1 XY position 0 other 6 Press 1 gt The link sets the trackpad to XY mode Link entry is complete Note Channels that control moving light movement should be set as Inde pendent channels in the Channel Attributes display chapter 21 moving lights 235 Flipped channels Use Flip to control moving lights Link the channels that control the pan attribute for moving lights on opposite sides of the stage and Flip one of the two channels When you control the two lights using the two wheels their movements are mirrored rather than parallel The Flip command inverts the output of the channel to which it is applied A flipped channel outputs at full when set to zero and at zero when set to full Use the Channel Attributes display to mark a channel flipped The flipped channels will have their
49. Show Control Both MIDI protocols may be enabled at the same time and are disabled individually 278 Express User Manual DMX512 Mode DMX512 Mode is softkey S2 in the Input Output Configuration dis play Use S2 DMX512 Mode to set a DMX512 port to multiplex mode or normal mode Multiplex mode allows dimmers to be used with ETC Source 4 multiplexers Switching from multiplex to normal mode will cause dimmers on that port to be taken out of the patch DMX512 Port DMX512 Port is softkey S1 in the Input Output Configuration display S1 DMX512 Port allows selection of a DMX512 output port to put into multiplex mode or to change the starting DMX512 number DMX512 starting numbers may not be changed by the user if any port is in multiplex mode Example S1 DMX512 Port 3 S2 DMX512 Mode Enter 1 Enter sets port 3 to multiplex mode DMX512 Speed DMX512 Speed is softkey S4 in the Input Output Configuration dis play S4 DMX512 Speed changes the DMX512 transmission rate to accom modate DMX512 receivers that accept data at different rates Four rates are available Max Fast Medium and Slow The DMX Speed should be set to Max when used with ETC DMX512 receivers Other equipment may require slower speeds DMX512 Start DMX512 Start is softkey S3 in the Input Output Configuration display Use S3 DMX512 Start to set the starting dimmer number of aDMX512 port If any port is in multiplex mode the start
50. Stage mode display appears on the Command display monitor A sample Stage mode display is shown below Grandmaster 100 Sub Page 1 11 001 02 03 04 C 08 09 10 11 12 3 14 15 025 26 27 2 29 33 34 35 36 38 39 049 50 58 59 60 b1 62 63 Fader A B Fader C D C 6 Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate Comp lete 5 t1 100 100 Gunshot Clear gt 6 T 3 Cue Part Time Wait Link Follow Rate vey Toad exits 11 PT 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 Load More 8 Sneak pdate Rate Sub Softkeys Flash The examples in this chapter demonstrate how to create a variety of cues in Stage display mode Cues consist of channel levels and cue attributes Each example in the text illustrates a different cue attribute However multiple attributes can be applied to one cue Express User Manual Recording a cue in Stage In this cue you will only set channel levels Default settings will determine all other attributes of the cue You can change most default settings from the System Settings menu See Chapter 3 Entering system settings for information about setting and changing defaults Follow these steps to record cue 1 Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode Prompt reads Select channel numbers Press 1 Thru 1 01 Selects channels 1 through 10 Press At Prompt reads Enter intensity Press 5 0 Sets a level of 50 percent for channels 1 through 10 5 Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press E
51. Status display Selected channels Selected channels are channels over which you have immediate key board control You can modify selected channels with Full At I or the fader wheel Selected channels are displayed in yellow and their levels are red on white You can select channels in most display modes Selected captured channels are live channels that are under immediate keypad control Channels can be selected and captured only in Stage modes You can select channels in Blind but they won t be captured since Blind mode is not live Press Rel once to release selected channels Set Clock Set Clock is softkey S2 in the Setup display Use S2 Set Clock to set the real time clock to correct time and date Set Dimmer Set Dimmer is softkey S7 in the Dimmer Monitoring Functions dis play Use S7 Set Dimmer to set a dimmer or group of dimmers to a level at the rack ignoring any DMX512 levels This requires a system connected by ETCLink to a Sensor dimming system 294 Express User Manual Setup The Setup display allows you to access system setting information print and disk functions and macro editing as well as optional control informa tion Setup 10 58 AM The Garden Plot Memory left 64 System Settings Input Output Configuration Disk Functions Clear Functions Print Functions Options Settings Macro Editing ETCLink Functions Channel Attributes Real Time Programs Thursday 0
52. This procedure also works if the submaster is not active In either case the new rate is automatically recorded in the submaster Action Keystrokes 1 Press Stage Selects Live display 2 Presssubmaster5 sbump Selects submaster 5 button 3 Press Sub S3 Rate Activates rate control Prompt reads Select submaster rate and press ENTER or use wheel to alter rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal 4 Move Rate wheel Sets and records fade rate for submaster 5 If submaster is run ning fade proceeds at new rate Note When the submaster rate is controlled by the rate wheel the sub master s number turns blue on the Submaster List Controlling submaster fades manually When you press the bump button on a timed submaster recorded fade times play back as you recorded them Express allows you to use the slider to take manual control of submasters recorded with fade times The Submaster List shows the progress of the submaster s fade To over ride the fade push the submaster s slider to a higher level than the fade lower if inhibitive Once the slider passes the fade or meets it at Full on pile on submasters or zero on inhibitive submasters control of the fade transfers to the slider and you have full manual control of the submaster Move the slider to set the fade level Once you use the slider to complete the fade manual con trol ends chapter 11 submasters 131 Copying submasters To copy a look from one submast
53. To select cue type press TYPE Selects cue 2 Selects channel 13 Prompt reads Select channel numbers Adds channel 15 to your selected channels Selected channels are displayed in yellow Sets channels at full intensity level Note When using Full you do not have to press At first 6 Press Record 7 Press Enter Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Records cue 2 with channels 13 and 15 at Full When you record the cue channel levels set by a fader change from red indicating a channel level set on the keypad to colors based on the chan nels level movements from cue to cue See page 8 for more information on what channel level colors mean chapter 6 cues 55 Recording a cue with a single fade time Unless you tell it otherwise Express assigns default fade times to any cue you record If you prefer you may record cues with custom fade times instead Fade times can be zero seconds to 99 59 minutes long They may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds in decimal format Acceptable time values include 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 sec onds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds Follow these steps to record a cue with a custom fade time Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage or Blind Selects display mode 2 Press Cue Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Press 3 Selects cue 3
54. a coats ake ee erate as a AN 264 Appendix C Specificati s 0 ri Ry BEERS Ao BRE SE EA oe TA 267 Appendix D RETEFENCO scaner ett bed a 271 DES PTS be ota a EEEE T TEER nai oA ee Cent E Bia 272 ALFA Goethe pation A Ar ay SR ae eek NAP ey be a 272 Alternates noge A Mia cies ot ariel Santen EA 272 ANA se serch a Gongs Wane tua te 272 rra nn A o ends Megat 272 AD a A AA qe aes 272 Baterak ri dts O EEA E 272 BAGG cee as tee Rates Ma whe ap ice aa a GP gayle aA heb 273 Blackout 6 lt aid Mae te OMe Hack dnt Ooo eet 273 BUG ices A A oa Saal 273 Bounce Effect erekruis a paadek a eae 273 Bounce Subroutine 6 0 ns 273 BIG a tears ta See ees 273 BUMP Status pava aoe sats Pacem 273 Cancel uba ete Meany aa y Rach adh rd Ook he ticas ft 274 Captured channelS 0 00 ccc eee 274 Channel se 5 wats A ale da ane Gace 274 Clear Key Pad noises che sachs ae SS See ee SR oe PA 274 Clearefader its eai cea a tas a a e 274 Clear Odds E E rs Dl io 274 Copy MactO to teas o a a De ee 274 Cross iaa ara ao E E AA ao 275 CUE Parra ota de ath At o A rai 275 CU ii Dra ln Sp ae Ren Ba 275 GUS EST A toes ats os Bo td ton ote tals lia ico Gee 275 Cue steps Subroutine 0 eee 275 Decimal DOME vs wala adn pattie wate tela nae 275 Balete a Oe OS 276 Delete CU iar tar on gery nes ere 276 Delete Entry se vana ob eae Par ee eee 276 Delete OOUE rr ite nue air hen Ole ae ea BS 276 Delete Madison ai Dia rs ts a Ya 276 Delete Parr toa le ld on
55. and hold the bump but ton It runs until channels reach full recorded levels then holds at full as long as you hold the bump button the downfade begins when you release it If you don t hold the bump button for the duration of the upfade time channels do not reach their full recorded levels Note If you do not enter a dwell time for a submaster the submaster defaults to a manual dwell To convert a timed dwell to a manual dwell in Blind mode follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Sub Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE 2 Press 5 Selects submaster 5 Corner reads Sub 5 3 Press Time Time Prompt reads Enter dwell time Press CLEAR for hold press CLEAR CLEAR for manual operation 4 Press Clear Clear Corner reads Dwell Man 5 Press Enter Enter Dwell time is set to Manual for submaster 5 chapter 11 submasters 125 Adding a rate to a submaster Rate allows you to record submasters that play back faster or slower than their recorded fade times This can be especially helpful when you are trying to calculate complex timing information for effects loaded to a sub master Note If you adjust the rate on a submaster containing an effect the rate adjustments affect individual step timing but do not change the overall effect timing Rate is expressed as a percentage A submaster with a rate of 100 plays back at its recorded fade time A rate of 300
56. and indicates the connector used by each accessory The front panel includes a connector for an alphanumeric keyboard switched outlets manufactured by optional 1 0 DMX out parallel port 6 26A sb 120 VAC 50 60 Hz_ Electronic Theatre Controls Inc RFU 1512 513 1024 1025 1536 parallel printer P PUSH PUSH PUSH USH Middleton WI USA O o Ov o Be ee ee O O H fu Wy a a al a 6 26Asb 120VAC 50 60 Hz ETCNet E a c aee 5 AA CO Gum Y RR a nKh EE Re li Q kooo O De In order to activate the Remote Interface you must first adjust the set tings of a number of DIP switches on the Remote Interface s main circuit board appendix a installation 255 DIP switch and jumper settings The Remote Interface s main circuit board contains one 8 switch DIP switch unit at location S1 and a set of 14 jumpers at location J22 In order to activate the Remote Interface you must first adjust the settings on these jumpers and switches 1 Remove the screws that secure the top panel 2 Raise the top panel to expose the internal circuitry 3 Locate jumpers 1 through 14 location J22 4 If your network cable is plugged into the BNC connector ThinNet install jumpers 1 through 6 Be certain jumpers 7 through 12 are not installed 5 If your network cable is plugged into the
57. back cue 1 Chan 1 At 5110 Modify channel 1 to 50 percent With cue 1 in a fader channel 1 is modified to 50 percent To change a channel level that affects only the cue you modify use Record Modify the cue press Record enter the cue number and press Enter Only the current cue is modified The track that encompasses the channel is inter rupted but continues in the following cues at the originally tracked level The results of modifying cue 1 and using Record are illustrated in Figure 2 Chant Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chan5 Cue 1 50 Cue 2 FF FF Cue 3 FF FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Figure 2 Note that channel 1 is not affected in cues 2 and 3 Also note that when you record a modified cue that is in a playback fader the changes are reflected in the fader That is when you release the channels you have modified they remain on stage chapter 7 track 77 If you change the level in the beginning or middle of a track you may want the change to continue through the remainder of the original track To track the level modification we just recorded in the example above use Track instead of Record to modify channel 1 Press Track enter cue number and press Enter If you use Track rather than Record to record the changes made to the cue illustrated in Figure 1 the results will be as illustrated in Figure 3 versus the results from using Record illustrated in Figure 2 Chan1 Chan2 Chan3 Cha
58. back panel 5 Insert the female end of the monitor power cord in the connector on the back of the monitor 6 Insert the male end of the monitor power cord in a grounded 120 VAC outlet 7 Insert the male end of the console power cord in a grounded 120 VAC outlet For 220 VAC operation consult ETC VGA monitor console connector HD DB15 female VGA monitor pinout 1 Red video Green video Blue video Ground Ground Red ground Green ground Blue ground not connected 10 Ground 11 Ground 12 not connected 13 H H V sync 14 V sync 15 not connected OONOOBRWND Note In some installations you may need additional grounding An addi tional grounding location is provided on the rear of the console for this pur pose This console is not certified for use in wet locations 246 Express User Manual Connecting dimmers These instructions explain how to connect DMX512 outputs and provide DMX512 connector pinout specifications The Express console provides two DMX512 output ports for a total capacity of 1 024 outputs Follow these steps to connect dimmers to your console 1 Verify that your dimmer connector pinout matches the pinout listed below If your pinout does not match contact your dealer or ETC Caution Your dimmer control common must be compatible with con sole control common they must either be the same level or the dimmer control common must float Verify compatibility with your dealer if yo
59. change To mark a channel as independent follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 1 Enter 3 Enter channel number s to be independent and press S1 Independent Use Thrul And and Except to select multiple channels 4 Press 1 then press Enter Action Selects Setup menu Selects Channel Attributes display Prompt reads Select channel number s Selects channel Prompt reads Enable disable independent channel s 1 Enable 0 Disable Channel is independent chapter 5 setting channel levels 39 Flipped channels The Flip command inverts the output of the channel to which it is applied A flipped channel outputs at full when set to zero and at zero when set to full Use S2 Flip to mark a channel flipped The flipped channels will have their outputs inverted The levels will not appear inverted on the Stage dis play but the level sent to the channel is inverted This is particularly useful for some moving light functions For example flip the output of the channel controlling the pan of one of two moving lights If you then record both lights pan control channels to a submaster the two lights movements mirror each other To mark a channel as flipped follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 1 Enter Selects Setup menu Selects Channel Attributes display Prompt reads Select channel number s 3 Enter chann
60. console software uses part of the available memory to store setup options and other console information shown above as System setup Express User Manual chapter 2 monitor displays Express provides a color video monitor This display provides information regarding your show including a cue list the current status of the console s two fader pairs and a variety of user selectable displays These displays allow you to create and run shows and to configure your console and your lighting system If your system includes an ETCNet network additional monitors may be installed at other locations such as backstage or in the sound booth These remote monitors show the same displays as the console s monitor See Appendix A Installation for informa tion about installing remote monitors This chapter includes descriptions of the following displays e Stage e Blind e Flexichannel e Patch e Playback Express User Manual Channel colors The colors in which channel numbers and output levels are displayed on screen provide information about the channels The following chart shows the meaning of colors in Stage Blind Fader and Tracksheet display modes Information on the use of colors in other display modes are included in their sections of this chapter Channel numbers Gray Unselected channel Yellow Selected channel Controlled by the trackpad when Enter is pressed or when you move your finger
61. cue group or submaster Softkeys Blind functions for S1 through S8 O Cue List Lists all cues along with their attributes The next cue in the cue list is yellow This can be changed from Stage mode but not from Blind chapter 2 monitor displays 11 F lexichannel If your system has the Flexichannel feature enabled only channels used somewhere in the show appear on the display screens These channels may be in cues submasters or groups or may be channels you have selected recently By only displaying channels used in the show you can reduce the amount of time you spend moving from page to page to find channels All other screen elements are unchanged Grandmaster 100 5 1 1 1 1 1 B Cue 11 Z e Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate Comp lete 3 Jn 20 5 100 42 200 Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate 200 X 5 200 Sneak pd Sof tkeys Working with Flexichannel active differs from working without Flexichan nel in only one respect selecting channels See Selecting channels in Flexichannel mode on page 41 for more information Note In Tracksheet and Patch modes channels are highlighted if they appear in the Flexichannel list or are grayed out if they do not See Enable disable Flexichannel on page 18 for information on enabling Flexichannel Updating Flexichannel When channels that were used in a show are removed from the show they remain on the channel list until it is updated The Purge Flexi softke
62. erates a load error that appears on the Load Management display The information shown on the Load Management display includes the dimmer number the recorded load of the dimmer and the actual load the system has detected for that dimmer D immer Recorded Load Actual Load recordet oat Actual Load 4 OW c 3004 OW 4504 ow 7004 39004 Follow these steps to list all dimmers that have load errors Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 3 Select 4 Load Manage Selects Load Management ment and press Enter display Note If you have a printer attached to your console you may print the Load Errors screen To print a list of dimmer load errors from this screen press S1 Print Screen The console sends the Load Error list to the printer chapter 19 sensor dimming 205 Sensor dimming system status The System Status display provides information about your Sensor dim ming system Press Setup 9 Enter 1 Enter to access the System Status display 03 54 PM Multiplex Firing Mode Disabled Backup Looks Inactive ETCL ink System Wide Panic Error on Rack Racks On Line Racks in Configuration 27 NY 83 84 85 S6 NY se Play Record Dimmer Rack Oo Pe Backup Backup Status Status Return e Multiplex firing mode shows whether Multiplex mode is enabled or disabled for your system If Multiplex mode is disabled
63. for a submaster the submaster defaults to a manual dwell Minus Use to decrease the selected number by one Example Cue 4 selects cue 3 Example Dim 6 At 7 5 patches dimmer 6 at 73 percent More Softkeys More Softkeys is softkey S7 in many displays When a display has more than eight soft keys the console displays a softkey labeled S7 More Softkeys Press S7 to display additional softkeys appendix d reference 287 Moving channels Moving channels are channel levels that change from one cue to the next In Stage mode all moving channels are displayed in green In Blind moving channels are displayed in green if they are moving down or blue if they are moving up Multipart cue A multipart cue consists of up to eight parts each of which is essentially an independent cue with its own channel levels and timing information Parts accept most standard cue attributes with the exception of Follow and Label which apply only to the overall cue You may record a cue as a multipart cue or record it as a standard one part cue and split it later Each part of a multipart cue may consist of any number of channels but a channel may only be included in one part of a multipart cue If you record a channel in a part and that channel is already included in another part the channel will be placed in the new part and be removed from the older part automatically Multiplex Multiplex is softkey
64. groups You may make a copy of a group then use the copy as the foundation for anew group You can copy groups in Stage or Blind modes To copy a look from one group to another follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind or Stage Selects display mode 2 Press Group Prompt reads Group mode Select group number to use as group 3 Press 1 Enters the number of the group you wish to copy Corner reads Group 1 4 Press Full Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit 5 Once the group is dis Prompt reads played press Record To record group select Group number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press 5 Enters the number of the new group Corner reads Group 5 Press Enter Group copy is complete You can now modify the new group Note You may also copy a group s channels and levels to a cue or a sub master To do so press Cue or Sub in place of Group in step 5 chapter 10 groups 111 Using cues or submasters as groups If you wish you can treat the channels recorded in a cue or a submaster as If they were a group bringing them up on stage or including them in other level setting operations For example to bring up a cue on stage as a group follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Group Tells Express to treat the next entry as a group Prompt r
65. groups submasters effects and any other information that you have in the console at the time you record the show are saved We recommend that you keep at least two backup copies of each show on diskette When using the record option any fades being executed are interrupted during the record operation fades resume when record is complete To record a show from memory to a diskette follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Insert a formatted diskette in disk drive 2 Press Setup Selects Setup display 3 Press 3 Disk Functions Selects Diskette Functions Enter menu 4 Press 1 Write Show to The following screen appears Disk Enter 5 Press Enter or press Message appears on screen Clear to cancel the To disk in progress Message operation remains until show is recorded chapter 15 diskette functions 173 Reading a show from diskette When you read a show and system settings from a diskette and load it into memory the new show completely overwrites the current show including channel and dimmer counts and default times and level There fore if you want to keep the current show follow the instructions on page 172 to record current show before you read a new show from diskette Fades being executed are interrupted during the read operation fades resume when read is complete To read all information from diskette into memory follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Insert diskette in disk drive
66. ince O ene GOP soy ae Rani Boo 288 Pause Printer ren ee eles sind Mae ae ates oe ars Pat tet Ooo ere 289 PilGzOn SUBMAaSTER ulate ie ds ee a ee Bos 289 Play Backups tic allas oa ale cates les na coda 289 PIUS pc in ir hee heen neg 289 Positive Negative 0 0002s 289 Previous Page vi aus pede eas Paar eae eee a 289 PRIAtSChECAines onise tun ada aida ee ek 2S 289 Profiles sg set whe nae as cate a ia Ea 289 Purge Flek nnd ia ae ar ea Ore ee Beas 290 QUICKSTE DY suas tersa aac ay Se Se eae SRR oe AO 290 Rack StatUS vi 264 oe aes othe rs tas batten EAs 290 RANGOM Ss a oe nord Oe a ae Ba oe eg 2 ae wo oe 290 Random Rates os ace ey Seite ace oe ata ee cee ete ee 290 Rate fader nek caved aver hele a ANA AAD ee em eS 290 Rate audit eat ar tte ariba heh white Med fh cast AG 291 o A Sadie ganic GP ool Rae Bk 291 Record Backups ocd acid vee ee ante a he ed Ce 291 Recordi Odds nS duane a ae Baa 291 Record FOCKOUE y aniiieg aed paaga bins poeta date la eared 291 R corded channels vrai ewe bees deen i e bs 291 PREGA SC rset stares tele Sage Gag ol en bes nt et eee 292 Replace INsSert ois aca on Pare eee 292 RESEL SYSTEM e wats ue eap aek niha nGa i a ae ee Ba 292 A A a a a E os 292 NS E A E N 292 RIQNEAMOW s t ara aaa aaa Aida es ON a 292 SElECE CUS aea EAA ale a ons Thai ot dete la ES 292 Selec EDITE it dhe eden dvs ys Gan a ee ae ban 292 STA EA srish dS Cuca ee ed Ree Ree ae 293 S l6ct Macro avia ar eo ad ae BA Mae a cee a
67. is softkey S1 in the System Settings display Press S1 Purge Flexi to recalculate the list of channels used in Flexi channel mode This also happens automatically when you load a show from disk or when you turn Flexichannel on Quickstep Enable Disable Quickstep is softkey S1 after S7 More Softkeys in the Stage displays S1 Quickstep allows you to run through a show checking all cues without having to wait for fades When Quickstep is active the faders ignore all upfade downfade and wait times Cues snap immediately to their completed levels when you press Go or Back Disable Quickstep mode by pressing S7 again or by leaving the Stage display Rack Status Rack Status is softkey S6 in the System Status and Dimmer Status displays Use S6 Rack Status to check information about your dimmer racks including rack type starting address port information voltage frequency and ambient temperature Random Random is softkey S6 in the Blind Effect Attribute display Use S6 Random to cause the step list execution to be selected and run randomly To cancel the Random attribute press S6 again Random Rate Random Rate is softkey S7 in the Blind Effect Attribute display Press S7 Random Rate to cause the rate to be randomly selected and applied to each step The selection will be within the range defined for Low random rate and High random rate Rates may range from 0 to 2 000 To cancel the Random Ra
68. is the length of time the submaster s channel levels stay at their full recorded levels before the downfade starts Downfade time is the length of time it takes a submaster s channels to fade from their recorded levels to zero When you record fade times for a submaster you can play the recorded fade with the bump button or override it manually with the slider See Con trolling submaster fades manually on page 130 for more information Note Default fade time is O Man 0 meaning the submaster has a zero upfade a manually controlled dwell time and a zero downfade Channels stay at full recorded levels as long as the bump button is held Fade times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds in decimal format Fade times can be programmed from 1 second to 99 59 minutes Acceptable time values include 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 seconds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds 122 Express User Manual Adding fade and dwell times You can add fade and dwell times to a submaster from Stage or Blind mode To add fade times to a submaster follow these steps in either mode Keystrokes Action 1 Press Sub Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE 2 Press 5 Selects submaster 5 Corner reads Sub 5 3 Press Time Prompt reads Enter upfade time 4 Use keypad to enter Prompt reads upfade time and press Enter dwell time Time Press CLEAR for hol
69. links are recorded does not affect their operation However your numbering may be useful to you in terms of logical organi zation To insert a link follow these steps Keystrokes 1 N Press Setup 1 1 Enter Press S7 Link List Press S5 Insert Link Press 1 Enter Proceed with normal link entry as described in Set ting up a link on page 232 Action Selects Channel Attributes display Selects Link List display Prompt reads Select link number Prompt reads Select link number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects link 1 to insert All links higher than 1 up to the first gap in the Link List if any are renum bered to make room Prompt reads Select X wheel channel number Precede with AND to add to existing link or EXCEPT to delete from link chapter 21 moving lights 239 Moving a link Use S7 Move Link to renumber a link or a group of links All links in a group will be renumbered sequentially To move a link to an empty space on the Link List follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 1 1 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display 2 Press S7 Link List Selects Link List display Prompt reads Select link number 3 Press S7 Move Link Prompt reads Select link number s to move then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 6 Enter Prompt reads To move selected link s select target link and press
70. look will be cleared from the stage chapter 19 sensor dimming 211 Error messages ETCLink provides advisory messages for a wide variety of conditions including information regarding your dimmers racks system data ports and loads These messages fall into two categories fatal messages and secondary messages Fatal messages deal with anything that could potentially terminate or dras tically change the look of your show You may set fatal messages to be displayed even when secondary messages have been disabled Secondary messages deal with individual dimmer problems and warnings of potential rack temperature problems These messages are generally less critical than the fatal messages If you wish secondary messages may be disabled without disabling fatal messages See Disabling second ary messages on page 212 for more information Express displays error messages in advisory windows that appear regard less of which display mode you have chosen They may also appear in abbreviated forms on the Status and About screens Advisories are cleared as soon as you enter any keystroke For example suppose the dimming system detects a problem with dimmer 1 As shown on the screen below an advisory message appears informing you of the problem Stage Chan 15 25 05 006 07 08 09 10 011 12 13 14 15 016 17 18 19 20 021 22 23 duisory Dimmer 1 output has failed off Either the cir t breaker has tripped or the dimmer ne gt to be repl
71. o o o o ooooooooooooooo 19 Setting time tomate dd di ltd Mae dl a a 20 Record ibockKd lt a a ED 20 Enable disable Bump keyS 0ooooococcocc cece eee 21 Setting ClOCK 1 oi Seale a velcro es oY alowed Bq ne Bees ON G Pe 22 2 Express User Manual Chapter 4 A E a 23 Selecting one to one PatCh o ooooooooocoo 24 Creating CUSTOM Datel imc oh Pe Hehe eA ek E wee 24 Patching dimmers to channels 0 0 0 0 000 eee eee 25 Proportional patching 00 eee eee 26 Unpatching individual dimmers 252200055 27 Show labels ape cuts eevee is ged certs cee ie ade land taeda cil 27 Assigning a profile toa dimmer 0 000000 28 Dimmer profiles sai eda la ee Raed fonds act 28 Capturing channels in Patch 2 0 0 0 0 0 00 0c cece eee 29 DIME CABO suede te ee oun eed Bala a a tl een Oe cena 30 AU Besa tect tt St ae thin hme ace Pees ca ee sata a 31 About DIMME eos bo ore A ee eh eh OA hes 31 About Dimmer with ETCLink o oooooo oo ooooo 32 Multiplexed dimmers ooo 33 Patching to a Strand CD80 dimmer rack 200 34 Chapter 5 Setting channel levels 00000 0000000000 oe 35 ChamneluMOdeSe lt sa e a conta esc eae ad hee e ao da 36 Captured channels arceri bf ten eb th oA ee ling oh bots dhe 36 Selected Channels 10 soe do ot da a ie dA Nai 36 Recorded ChaM lS nacos peta lie Pt da 36 Moving channels ooocooooooo eee 36 Tracked channels oia eed wd Ae
72. outputs inverted The levels will not appear inverted on the live display Mirroring two moving lights In the previous example two moving lights were linked so that they would match movements In other words when one moved up the other moves up When one moves to the right the other moves to the right and so on In this example the Flip attribute is used to reverse the pan control chan nel With pan reversed when one light moves to the left the other moves to the right and vice versa The lights tilt still matches All four channels are set as independent to protect the moving lights from sudden movement when the Grandmaster or Blackout controls are used Channels 4 and 5 control pan and tilt for the first light and channels 14 and 15 control pan and tilt for the second light To link two moving lights with a mirrored pan follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 1 1 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display Press 4 And 14 Enter Selects channels 4 and 14 the pan channels Prompt reads Enable disable independent channel s 1 Enable 0 Disable 3 Press 1 gt Sets both channels as independent Prompt reads Enable disable flipped channel s 1 Enable 0 Disable Press 1 gt Sets both channels as flipped Prompt reads Select channel number s Press 5 And 1 5 gt Selects channels 5 and 15 the tilt channels Prompt reads Enable disable independent
73. outputs rise and fall for several minutes during the procedure To cancel a check load oper ation in progress press S7 Cancel Enter Follow these steps to check loads for your system Keystrokes Action 1 Set dimmers to be checked to a level above zero Only dimmers above zero are checked Press Setup Selects Setup display 3 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 4 Select 4 Load Manage Selects Load Management ment and press Enter display Note If you wish instead of setting the desired dimmers to a level in step 1 you may enter a list of dimmers to record in step 5 202 5 Press S4 Load Check You may enter specific dimmers to check 6 Press 0 Enter 7 Press Enter to proceed with the load check or press Clear to cancel the operation Express User Manual Prompt reads To check loads select dim mer s and press ENTER Enter 0 to check loads for all dim mers Advisory reads All dimmers with levels above zero will have their loads checked Levels on stage will change while the Load Check is in progress The system will automatically vary the dimmer outputs during the Load Check The process may take several minutes to complete Press Enter to proceed or press Clear to cancel Loads are checked for all dim mers with levels above zero Once complete advisory reads Record Loads processing has completed
74. period in the C D CaN WRU DN O O other fader Express s faders function in level override mode This means that the fader sliders control the percentage of completion of the fade If you like you can use the fader sliders to take manual control of fades For information on taking manual control of fades see the section titled Controlling fades manually later in this lesson Clearing faders Each timed fader is equipped with a Clear key To remove a cue from the fader press the appropriate Clear key Press Clear twice to clear an effect cue Pressing Clear removes the cue from the fader immediately unless you have reset the default fader clear time For instructions on changing fader clear time see Setting default fader clear time on page 16 Express User Manual Cue List The Cue List provides a list of cues for the show including all of the cues programmed attributes In addition the display provides information about which cue is active or running and on which fader the cue is running The Cue List on the Playback monitor displays the last cue played before the pending cue If a cue is currently playing the list shows the last cue played the playing cue and then the pending cue The pending cue is highlighted in white Cue indicators The color in which a cue is displayed provides information about the cue s current status Gray Cue is not selected and is not in a fader White
75. recorded level or to begin its programmed fade if it has one The LEDs show you which submasters are recorded A channel may be included in as many submasters as you choose You can record up to 24 submasters in each of ten pages of submaster mem ory for a total of 240 appendix d reference 297 Submaster bump buttons Use a submaster bump button to drive the assigned channels to their recorded levels in the recorded fade time This button may also be used when recording a submaster look Example Record Sub Bump 4 records the current look into submaster 4 Example Update Sub Bump 1 records the channels in the current look that are also in submaster 1 at their current levels Subroutine A subroutine is a cue that controls the playback of a series of existing recorded cues Subroutines are similar to linked cues except that they have more playback options Subroutines and effects can create similar looks However subroutines have some advantages over effects Since each step of a subroutine is a cue with proportional levels you can create loops or chases with propor tional looks You can also create nested loops or even use an effect cue as a step in a subroutine Also since subroutine steps are actual cues there is no limit to the number of channels you can use Suppress Labels Suppress Labels is softkey S4 in the Patch display Use S4 Suppress Labels in patch mode to hide the display of the dimmer la
76. ri a a a o e de Mines ltd A Ea 180 Goum SE A A A AR 180 Sl A ae ee ene cae a 181 Macros is ati GOR Ph dr e i eed A Gh eek SADE he 182 Pateh ertian A Ea e Ad Dd aa dd A he 183 ChannelrAttributesic dotan a ld bed ne y 183 Real Time Programs o o oooooooooo ee eee 184 Chapter 17 Clear functions 35566 4 50 265 ee Bh ht Sh de BEER 185 CIEArTURCHONS2 4 souk Aeneas oer EA eos a 186 SAO Wi chet fate te ete hie er Re Lhe tame adi ob Ar A LS 187 USS e o eee S 187 GIOUPS 2 eater need eae ot A a AAS 188 SUD SEIS ce Bee So esac nny Sree eK een se AN Pn RE SN 188 Show and Patchi 4 olas kw ost eon oy hou badane eb 189 MACOS seme o ool aD a ean Pee oon a E 190 Resets to l Patois tse nay tack ace o ue ees Dee ee 190 ChannelvAttributes vse adic soe teed ae Ae A 191 Real Time Programs esse nwa rad a as Madd eae aT 191 Reset system 0 eee 192 Chapter 18 ACCESOS a ads 193 Remote Focus Unit RFU ooo 194 WoTklIQNtST cotton Soe eS asta 195 Chapter 19 Sensor dimming 197 Enabling ETC ca a tds 198 Enabling ETCLink Messages o ooooococococco o 198 Monitoring dimmers 00 00 ta nyie ha da a naig 199 Recording dimmer loads o o o o ooooooooooooo 200 Checking dimmer loads ceser esses aret er ew eee 201 Clearing dimmer loads erer E En E r cece ee 203 Lodd Eror yib matraca totes Sak ota ditt dee Boe aS 204 Sensor dimming system status 0 0 00 00 araar 205 Dimmerrack Status ar sev sa a Pas aE Bee 206
77. save backup copies of shows on diskette The following options are described in this chapter e Formatting diskettes e Recording a show on diskette e Reading a show from diskette 170 Express User Manual Diskette management Express s diskette drive lets you save one show per high density 3 5 inch computer diskette This allows you to work on more than one show at a time or to use more than 600 cues for your production by loading a second show into memory Label each diskette carefully and clearly to help you keep track of what show is on the diskette You can also use the Read Show from Disk option to find out the name storage date and time of the show on any diskette We recommend that you make two back up copies of each show on sep arate diskettes and that you keep them in different locations If your show diskette were damaged a back up diskette stored at home could save you hours of work When you select diskette options any fades in progress are stopped Therefore if you need to load an additional show in the middle of a perfor mance load it between cues when all channels are static Fader and sub master outputs are maintained as the new show loads Before you can use a diskette in Express you must format it on the con sole or on an IBM PC compatible with a high density drive Formatting instructions are on the following page Storing diskettes e Store diskettes at a temperature between 50 and 140 degrees Fahr enhei
78. so on Channel levels are set to Full and up dwell down times are set to 1 Manual 1 To reset your channels and submasters follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 System Settings Enter 3 Press 1 1 Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 Enter 4 Press Enter Action Displays Setup menu Displays System Settings menu Prompt reads Select page to default then press ENTER 1 Page 1 2 Page 2 0 All pages Channels are assigned to sub masters The display returns to Setup menu Setting time format Express User Manual Express consoles allow you to display time in either 12 or 24 hour format Follow these steps to choose your preference Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 1 2 12 24 hour clock and press Enter 4 Enter 0 or 1 and press Enter Record Lockout Action Selects Setup display Selects System Settings menu Prompt reads Enter 12 or 24 hour clock 0 12 hour 1 24 hour Sets the clock mode You may set the console to disable the Record function This protects a finished show from inadvertent changes To disable the Record function in your system follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 1 3 Record Lock out 4 Press 1 Enter to lock out the record function Action Selects
79. steps but select 0 or2 in step 4 chapter 19 sensor dimming 199 Monitoring dimmers When used in conjunction with Sensor dimming equipment the Express allows you to monitor individual dimmer loads in your system This can greatly simplify troubleshooting by identifying such things as burned out lamps and incorrectly lamped or unplugged fixtures When dimmer monitoring is in use Sensor electronics constantly monitor dimmer loads If there is an unexpected fluctuation of more than 20 per cent in the load on any dimmer a message identifying the dimmer and describing the problem is displayed in a window on one of the console s display screens Note Error messages are also displayed on the system s Sensor CEMs In order to monitor normal dimmer loads the system must first earn what constitutes a normal load Record Loads is the operation that allows you to teach the system what the range of normal loads is You may Record Loads either from the Express or from a Sensor AF CEM 03 55 PM Dimmer Recorded Load Actual Load Dimmer Recorded Load Actual Load 4 OW 5 9004 ow 4504 Ow 700W 9004 You should run Record Loads any time you relamp your fixtures change the type of fixtures you are using change the dimmer numbering scheme or make any other significant changes to your system In general Record Loads should be the last step in setting up your system Loads are recorded from the Load Management display shown above Note L
80. submaster press S7 More Softkeys 6 Press S1 Step andenter Prompt reads the number of the step to Select channel numbers edit Press Enter Precede with AND to add to existing step or EXCEPT to delete from step 7 Use the keypad to enter Prompt reads the channels or groups you Select step time want to include in the step then press gt 8 Use the keypad to enter Prompt reads step time range is O to Enter step in time 9 59 minutes then press gt 140 10 11 12 13 14 15 Use the keypad to enter the In time then press gt Use the keypad to enter Dwell time then press gt Use the keypad to enter Out time then press gt Use the keypad to enter the low level then press gt l Use the keypad to enter high level then press Enter Repeat steps 5 through 13 for each effect step you wish to create Press Record enter the cue or submaster number and press Enter Press Clear to cancel Express User Manual Prompt reads Enter step dwell time Prompt reads Enter step out time Prompt reads Select low level Prompt reads Enter high level Prompt reads Select step numbers Cue or submaster containing effect is recorded chapter 12 effects 141 Default element assignment Rather than assign elements to steps one at a time you can assign a range of elements to a range of steps on a one to one basis The console assigns elements
81. that includes groups its high and low values are proportional levels chapter 12 effects 139 Creating steps Create an effect by selecting the effect type for a cue or submaster then creating a series of steps in the Effect display Use the arrow keys to move around the Effect display and enter settings When you create a new step it takes the previous step s attributes as its defaults You may then edit the new step To edit a step attribute use the arrow keys to select the field of the attribute you wish to edit Use the keypad to enter the new setting for that attribute Then either press Enter to confirm the change without leaving the attribute field or press any arrow key to make the change and move to a different attribute field You can also use softkeys to move from field to field Follow these instructions to create a series of steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects the Blind display 2 Press Cue or Sub 1 Selects cue or submaster 1 Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Or Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE 3 Press Typel Prompt reads Select fade type 1 Crossfade 2 Allfade 3 Effect or 4 Subroutine Or Select submaster type 1 Pile on 2 Inhibitive 3 Effect 4 Press 3 Identifies cue or submaster 1 as an effect Selects Effect display Prompt reads Select step numbers 5 If you are creating an effect
82. the captured channel at 50 percent Press Rel twice to release captured channels Selected channels Selected channels are channels over which you have immediate keypad control You can modify selected channels with Full At 7 or the fader wheel Selected channels are displayed in yellow and their levels are red on white You can select channels in all display modes Selected captured channels are live channels that are under immediate keypad control Channels can be selected and captured only in Stage modes You can select channels in Blind but they won t be captured since Blind mode is not live Press Rel once to release selected channels Recorded channels Recorded channels are channel levels that have been recorded in a cue group or submaster In Stage mode recorded levels are displayed in green or magenta Recorded channels may be either moving or tracked in Blind mode see below Channel levels controlled by effects are displayed in white Channel levels controlled by submasters other than effect submasters are displayed in yellow Moving channels Moving channels are channel levels that change from one cue to the next In Stage mode all moving channels are displayed in green In Blind and Tracksheet moving channels are displayed in green if they are moving down or blue if they are moving up Tracked channels A tracked channel is a channel whose level is unchanged from the preced ing cue Tracked chann
83. the monitor power cord in the monitor con nector and the male end of the monitor power cord in the interface device connector labeled Switched outlets 2 Connect the cable to the connector labeled CRT 1 on the interface device 3 Turn monitor power switch to its On position VGA monitor console connector HD DB15 female VGA monitor pinout 1 Red video Green video 3 Blue video 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Red ground 7 Green ground 8 Blue ground 9 not connected 10 Ground 11 Ground 12 not connected 13 H H V sync 14 V sync 15 not connected appendix a installation 261 Installing remote macros The console provides four remote macro inputs through the 15 pin con nector on the back panel labeled Remote Macro A user supplied remote device connects to the console via a 24 AWG aluminum shielded multi conductor cable with one twisted pair designated for each switch Belden 9507 S R PCV Insulated or Alpha 5477 80 Deg C 300 V PVC The cable connector at the remote device will vary depending on the device itself Console connector Remote connector DB 15 female Connector type depends on unit Pin Function 1 Macro 1 901 Macro 1 901 3 Macro 1 902 4 Macro 1 902 5 Macro 1 903 6 Macro 1 903 7 Macro 1 904 8 Macro 1 904 9 Remote Trigger normally closed 30V 1 amp max 10 Remote Trigger normally open 30V 1 amp max 11 Remote Trigger common 30V 1 amp max 12 Ground 13 G
84. the sequence in Macro mode to adjust its operation Example Learn M3 Enter starts the macro Learn process for macro 3 Left Arrow Use to move through various displays including Stage Blind effects subroutines and macros appendix d reference 285 Level Use Level to immediately set channels and groups to the default level assignment determined in the Setup menu Example Channel 6 Level sets channel 6 to the default level Link Use Link to cause the linked cue to be loaded as the next available cue to link a macro execution to a cue or to select a link in the Link List Example Cue 1 Link 8 links cue 8 to cue 1 Example Cue 6 Link Enter Macro 4 Enter links macro 4 to cue 6 Load Check Load Check is softkey S4 in the Load Management display Use S4 Load Check to compare the current load on selected dimmers with their recorded loads Low High Low High is softkey S4 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Effect display Use S4 Low High to access the level field for the selected step s The first value is the low level to which the step elements will be set the second value is the high level for those elements Example Step 4 Thru 8 S4 Low High 0 gt 9 Enter sets the low level for steps 4 through 8 to zero and the high level to 90 percent Loop subroutine A subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Loop step It then returns to
85. this example to place a cue in a fader under rate override Keystrokes Action 1 Press Rate key for the Activates rate control fader in which the cue is running Press both Rate keys if you wish to control both faders 2 Move your finger on the Fades are placed under control of trackpad the trackpad Move your finger to adjust fade rates Fader Status window shows the current rate chapter 9 playing back cues 97 Quickstep Quickstep allows you to run through a show checking all cues without having to wait for fades When Quickstep is active the faders ignore all upfade downfade follow and wait times Cues snap immediately to their completed levels when you press Go or Back To enable Quickstep and run a cue check follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display 2 Press S7 More Soft Turns on Quickstep keys S1 Enable Quick step 3 Press Cue 1 Enter Selects cue 1 Press Go Cue 1 comes up on stage instantly 5 Continue to press Go until Each cue comes up on stage you have checked all cues instantly 6 Once you are finished Turns off Quickstep fades will press S1 Disable Quick operate normally step 98 Express User Manual chapter 10 Groups Express allows you to record frequently used combinations of channels into units called groups You may record up to 500 groups Once you record a group it can be combined with other channels and grou
86. to enter the Corner reads desired number of dim Dim 800 mers 5 Press Enter Number of dimmers is set to 800 Note If you increase the number of dimmers the additional dimmers are initially patched to channel zero From there you can assign them to the channel of your choice Setting number of channels Express allows you to control your dimmers with control channels Express defaults to the maximum number of channels the console can address Follow these steps to select the number of channels to use Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Set Selects System Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Select 2 Number of Prompt reads Channels and press Select number of channels Enter then press ENTER 4 Press 4 5 to enter the Corner reads desired number of chan Chan 45 nels 5 Press Enter Number of channels is set to 45 chapter 3 system settings 15 Setting default fade times Express allows you to assign default upfade and downfade times to cues or to control fade times manually Default fade times are five seconds Fade times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds in decimal format Fade times can be programmed from 1 second to 99 59 minutes Acceptable time values include 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 seconds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds Follow these steps to assign your desired fade times K
87. using ETCLink functions you must connect the system to the ETCLink network Follow these steps to activate your ETCLink connec tion allowing you to monitor the dimming system Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup menu 2 Select 6 Options Set Selects Options Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Press 8 ETCLink Enter Prompt reads Enable disable ETCLink 1 Enable 0 Disable Press 1 Enter Dimmer Monitoring is enabled If you wish to change the Prompt reads ETCLink address press 9 Select ETCLink address ETCLink Address Enter 6 Press 1 Enter ETCLink ETCLink address is changed address may be 1 or 2 Note If you change the ETCLink address you must cycle power to the console before the new address will take effect Enabling ETCLink messages If you wish ETCLink advisory messages to be displayed while you are operating the console you must enable them from the ETCLink Functions menu To enable advisories follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 3 Select 6 Display Adviso Prompt reads ries and press Enter Enable disable display of ETC Link advisories 1 Enable all 2 Enable fatal error advisories only 0 Disable 4 Press 1 Enter All ETCLink advisories are enabled Note To disable some or all advisories follow the same
88. 0 Submasters 131 132 Creating cues 50 Crossfade 48 275 Subroutine step 152 Cue 47 275 Allfade 48 As groups 111 Back 94 Blackout cue 80 Blind 53 Clear all 187 Convert to multipart 85 Copy 68 Copy to sub 132 Create loop sequence 60 Creating 50 Crossfade 48 Cue check 97 Cue List 70 Cue steps subroutine 275 Delete 67 Delete part 86 Effect 48 150 Follow 58 59 Go 94 Go to 94 Hold 94 Inserting 69 Link to macro 61 Load to sub 132 Modify 76 Modify attributes 63 Modify live 63 Modifying channels 63 Multipart 83 87 287 Playing back 89 307 308 Print 177 Print cue list 180 Quickstep 97 Record 49 55 56 57 Record as effect 150 Record w default time 52 Record Blind 54 Select cue 90 93 Solo 62 Specifications 268 Split fade time 56 Stage 51 Subroutine 48 Subroutine steps 152 Type 48 Update channels 64 65 Use as group 111 Viewing 50 Cue List 71 92 275 D Date 22 Decimal point 275 Default Channel Submaster link 19 Fade Time 15 Fader Clear Time 16 Level 16 Sneak Time 17 Delete 276 Channel 87 Cues 67 276 Delete Macro 276 Delete Step 277 Effect steps 277 Entry 276 Group 109 276 Link 241 Macro 166 Part of multipart cue 86 276 Submaster 133 277 Dimmer 277 About Dimmer 31 About Dimmer w ETCLink 32 Check loads 201 Clear loads 203 Dimmer check 30 Dimmer Status 277 Dimmer Status display 207 DMX512 speed 248 DMX512 starting number 247 Error messages 211 In
89. 0 FF Figure 6 Channel 5 tracks through cue 5 and ruins the blackout cue chapter 7 track 81 If cue 5 is an allfade Express records all unused channels at 00 percent In the example below an allfade enters 00 in channel 5 cue 5 When you track channel 5 through the sequence it won t track through the blackout cue To select the allfade type for cue 5 enter these keystrokes Blind Cue 5 Type 2 Selects allfade fade type Record 5 Enter Re records cue Now when we track channel 5 through the sequence cue 5 blocks the track The result is illustrated in Figure 7 Chan1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chan5 Cue 1 50 FF Cue 1 1 50 50 FF Cue 2 50 FF 00 FF Cue 3 50 FF FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 00 Figure 7 For more information on cue fade types see Cue types on page 48 82 Express User Manual chapter 8 multipart cues A multipart cue consists of up to eight parts each of which is essentially an independent cue with its own channel levels and timing information Parts accept most standard cue attributes with the exception of Follow and Label which apply only to the overall cue You may record a cue as a multipart cue or record it as a standard one part cue and split it later Each part of a multipart cue may consist of any number of channels but a channel may only be included in one part of a multipart cue If you record a channel in a part and that channel is already included in another
90. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Press 5 5 Press 8 gt Press gt Press 2 0 Press S1 Step 2 Enter Repeat steps 7 through 13 altering attributes as desired to add additional cues as subroutine steps Press S1 Step 6 Enter Press S2 Style to select a subroutine style You may need to press S7 More Softkeys first Styles are described on page 153 Press 3 Enter Press 8 Enter Complete entering all cue steps and style steps as described above Press Record enter cue number and press Enter to record subroutine cue Express User Manual Selects a level of 55 percent for the cue within the subroutine Prompt reads Enter upfade time Sets an upfade time of eight seconds Prompt reads Enter downfade time Sets a downfade time of eight seconds Prompt reads Enter follow time Sets a follow time of 20 seconds Step 1 is now complete Selects step 2 to edit Selects step 6 to edit Prompt reads Select style of subroutine command 1 Loop 2 Bounce 3 Jump to cue 4 Hold for go Selects Jump to cue style for step 6 Prompt reads Select cue number Selects cue 8 for Jump to cue When subroutine reaches step 6 the subroutine ends and runs cue 8 chapter 13 subroutines 157 Editing a subroutine To edit a subroutine select the step you wish to change by pressing S1 Step and
91. 2 Press Setup Press 5 Print Functions Enter Press 1 1 Print Channel Attributes Enter Press 0 1 or 2 then press Enter or press Clear to cancel the print operation Action Displays Setup menu Displays Print Functions menu Prompt reads Select attributes to print then press ENTER 1 Channel Attributes 2 Link List 0 both File sent to the printer 184 Express User Manual Real Time Programs Print Real Time Programs prints a list of programs recorded in the cur rently loaded show The printout provides complete information about the programs To print a full list of programs follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 5 Print Functions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3 Press 1 2 Print Real Prompt reads Time Programs Enter Press ENTER to print all pro gram events or select first program number to print 4 Press Enter or press File sent to the printer Clear to cancel the print operation chapter 17 clear functions This chapter includes instructions for using Express s clear options Each of the following clear functions is explained and illustrated on the follow ing pages e Show e Cues e Groups e Submasters e Show and patch e Macros e Reset patch e Channel attributes e Real Time Programs e Reset system 186 Express User Manual Clear functions Each option on the Clear
92. 27 If no macro is spec ified or if the macro number is out of range the com mand is ignored chapter 20 control interfaces 221 MSC commands transmitted by Express MIDI Show Control MSC allows the console to send the following com mands to MIDI devices If MSC output is enabled on the console the con sole automatically sends the MSC commands The console s transmitter Device ID must match the device ID for the MIDI device receiving the sig nals A B Go If a cue is pending the console transmits A B Go with cue number and a list entry of 1 If a cue is holding the console transmits A B Resume with cue number and a list entry of 1 C D Go A B Hold If a cue is running the console transmits A B Stop with If a cue is pending the console transmits C D Go with cue number and a list entry of 2 If a cue is holding the console transmits C D Resume with cue number and a list entry of 2 cue number and a list entry of 1 C D Hold Macros For macros 1 127 the console transmits Fire with the If a cue is running the console transmits C D Stop with cue number and a list entry of 2 macro number 222 Express User Manual Real time clock The Real Time Clock allows you to program macros to run in real time that is to run automatically at any time of day on any day of the week For example you might program the work lights to come on for a choir rehearsal
93. 4 April 96 Express Version 2 0 Clock Show Hide Labels Show Hide Labels is softkey S8 in the Patch display Press S8 Show Labels in Patch mode to display or hide the alphanu meric dimmer labels Sneak Sneak is softkey S1 in the Stage display Use Sneak to return modified channels to the level provided by the faders or submasters Channels will fade in the Sneak time established in the Setup menu unless a time is specified Channels may also Sneak to a specified level Example 1 S1 Sneak Enter Example 1 At 7115 S1 Sneak Time 5 Enter Solo Use Solo to clear non selected channels In Live mode press again to restore channels to previous setting Example Channel 1 Thru 1 0 Solo sets the levels of all channels other than channels 1 through 10 to zero appendix d reference 295 Sort Sort is softkey S8 after S7 More Softkeys in the Real Time Pro grams display Use S8 Sort to reorder Real Time Programs by time The system will automatically conduct a sort when the mode is exited or when moving copying or deleting programs Stage The Stage display represents the current live channel levels as set by the keypad faders and submasters combined Step Effect Subroutine Step is softkey S1 in the Blind Effect and Blind Subroutine displays Press S1 Step to select a step or range of steps for modification Example S1 Step 1 Enter selects step 1 Exam
94. 42 44 46 48 49 51 53 E5 57 59 50 52 54 56 58 60 61 63 65 67 69 yet 62 64 66 65 70 72 Fal FG PPP FS 61 53 74 76 78 80 52 54 G5 87 89 91 93 195 86 GS 90 92 94 96 121 123 127 129 131 122 14 126 130 152 133 135 137 138 141 143 134 155 133 140 142 144 146 147 149 151 153 155 146 143 150 152 154 156 157 159 163 165 1657 15 160 164 166 165 169 1141 1173 175 177 179 1791 172 1174 176 176 160 181 165 185 1987 109 182 154 186 155 190 chapter 5 setting channel levels Setting channel levels is the first step in recording cues submasters and groups Setting channel levels in Stage mode brings light levels up on stage Setting channel levels in Blind mode does not affect stage lights This chapter includes the following sections Channel modes Channel attributes Selecting channels Setting channel levels Channel check About Channel Express User Manual Channel modes Channels may be in any of the following modes Each responds differently to commands Captured channels Captured channels are channels that you have selected and are live on stage They remain live until you press Rel to release them Captured channels override all other channel settings For example if a channel is ina fader at 100 percent and you capture it and set it to 50 percent Express sets
95. 8 137 279 1 to 1 channel assignment 141 Alternate 142 Attributes 142 Bounce 142 Build 142 Configuring 142 Creating steps 139 Cue 48 150 279 Dwell time 138 Fade time 144 High and low levels 138 In time 138 Insert step 147 Modify 147 Negative 142 Out time 138 Positive 142 Random 142 Random Rate 146 Record as cue 150 Reverse 142 Specifications 269 Step element 141 Step time 138 Steps 138 138 140 148 295 Submaster 116 150 279 Express User Manual index 311 Electronic Theatre Controls Inc 3 Element 141 Enable ETCLink 198 279 ETCLink messages 198 Record Lockout 20 Enter 279 Enter Macro 279 Error messages 211 264 ETC MIDI 214 Configuring 215 Message format 215 216 ETCLink 197 205 About Dimmer 32 Advisory messages 211 264 Backup looks 209 Check Loads 201 Clear Loads 203 Enable 198 279 Error messages 211 Fatal messages 211 264 Load errors 204 Record Loads 200 Secondary messages 265 Set dimmer 208 Unset dimmer 208 ETCLink Functions 197 198 212 ETCNet 253 260 Except 126 280 F Fade Fade Type 298 Multipart 88 Rate 96 Split 56 Times 55 154 Type 48 Fade time effect 144 Fader Back 94 273 Clear 91 274 Default Clear Time 16 Go 94 281 Hold 94 283 Manual 95 Rate 290 Specifications 267 Status display 280 Timed 91 Flash 42 280 Flexichannel 11 18 168 280 Purge Flexi 11 41 Selecting channels 41 Update 11 312 Express User Manual Flip 37 39 235 281 Follow 58 59
96. Ds on page 119 for more information about LEDs Note When you read a new show into the console from a disk the con sole loads the same page number that was loaded from the previous show Any submasters on stage when you read a new show into the con sole remain on stage until you move their sliders to the home position Until the new submaster loads submaster LEDs flash indicating that the submaster on stage is from the previously loaded show When you move the slider to its home position the new submaster is loaded and the LED stops flashing chapter 11 submasters 119 Submaster LEDs Each submaster bump button contains one or two LEDs The color and state of the LED indicates the current state of that submaster as shown on the chart below Color State Meaning Off Submaster not loaded Green Solid Submaster loaded Green Slow Blink New submaster Loads when slider reaches home position Green Fast Blink Submaster on timed hold Press bump button to begin downfade If the LED on a slider is blinking slowly it means that you have changed pages and a new submaster is waiting to load The old submaster stays loaded until you move the slider to the home position When the slider reaches home the channel levels from the new page replace the old lev els Note If a submaster slider has both a submaster loading and a submaster on hold the submaster on hold takes priority and the LED blinks fast Press the bump button to downf
97. E amp E Xx oe 125 and 250 lighting control system Version 2 0 E gt FEA Lighting control system Version 2 0 User Manual Copyright 1994 96 Electronic Theatre Controls 4110M1001 Revised April 1996 Limited Warranty Electronic Theatre Controls ETC warrants to the original owner or retail customer that for a period of one year from date of deliv ery of a portable system or energization of a permanently installed system up to a maximum of 18 months from delivery its products will be free from defects in mate rials and workmanship under normal use and service Warranty is limited to 90 days for rental equipment Warranty does not cover any product or part of a product subject to accident negli gence alteration abuse or misuse or any accessories or parts not supplied by ETC Warranty does not cover consumable parts such as fuses lamps color media or components warranted directly to the owner by the original manufacturer ETC s warranty does not extend to Items not man ufactured by us Freight terms on warranty repairs are FOB ETC factory or designated repair facility Collect shipments or freight allowances will not be accepted ETC s sole responsibility under this war ranty shall be to repair or replace at ETC s option such parts as shall be deter mined to be defective on ETC s inspection ETC will not assume any responsibility for any labor expended or materials used to repair any equipmen
98. Enter Press FULL button for 100 5 Enter the level at which to Advisory reads set the dimmers Enterin To confirm press ENTER two digit form e g one To cancel press CLEAR percent 01 6 Press Enter Dimmers are set to desired level Unsetting a dimmer To unset a dimmer or group of dimmers and return them to normal oper ation follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 3 Press S6 Unset Dim Prompt reads mer Select dimmer number s to unset then press ENTER Enter 0 to unset all dimmers 4 Enter the dimmers you Prompt reads wish to unset and press To confirm press ENTER Enter Press 0 Enter to To cancel press CLEAR unset all set dimmers 5 Press Enter Dimmers are unset chapter 19 sensor dimming Working with Sensor backup looks 209 A backup look is a recording of a selected look on stage stored in the Sensor CEM The Sensor system allows you to use either your Express console or any CEM to bring that look up on stage You may save and use up to 32 backup looks Recording a backup look To record a backup look follow these steps Keystrokes T Use your console to create the desired look on stage Press Setup Select 9 ETCLink Func tions and press Enter Press 1 Dimming System Status Enter Press S3 Record Backup Ente
99. Express displays the channels used in the group but does not enter Group Editing mode 5 Press 2 5 Thru 3110 At Modifies look adding channels 5 O 25 through 30 at 50 percent 6 Press Record Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 7 Press Enter Records group 1 with new levels Note This process can also be used to create a new group in Blind display mode If the group number you enter to modify doesn t exist it is created as anew group 106 Express User Manual In Stage Follow these steps to change a group s channel levels in Stage display mode Keystrokes Action 1 2 w Press Stage Press Group 2 Press Full Select channels you want to modify and adjust chan nel levels Press Record Group Press 2 Press Enter Selects Stage display mode Selects the group number you want to modify Prompt reads Group mode Select group number to use as group Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit Alters look Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Enters the group number you are modifying Corner reads Group 2 Re records group 2 with modified levels chapter 10 groups 107 Using Update to modify groups The Update feature allows you to easily record changed levels on Stage into a selected gr
100. Follar lara NaS whey land ets eat 59 Combining Link and Follow to create playback loops 60 Using Link to link a macro to a cue o ooooooooooo 61 Recording a Cue USING SOlO 1 rios PE Aad eae we ae 62 Modifying a recorded cue live 0 ee 63 Modifying channels ina cue 0 000 c ee eee 63 Modifying cue attributes 0 0 0 0 00 0 63 Using Update to modify channels inacue 64 Using Update to add channels toa cue 0 65 Using Update to modify fade rate o ooooooooo 66 Del ting CUES eve we whe oka wR ES Oe ue Cah Re ee ee 67 COPVING CUES edo ae eo RA 68 nseri CUCS asi anau a a as Mudd awa hee 69 A A O wet a poe hy Pha ee des 70 Editing cue attributes in Cue LiSt o o o oo o o oooo 71 Chapter 7 Trak anin Cael aig A EN 73 TRACK FE CONG ewan is Beet a os 74 Using record to create trackS o o o ooooooomooo 75 Recording modified cues 2 0 2 aana 76 Inserting CUES crio es Bone een Baines Peon Poe Aes 78 Blackout cues and tracking 0002020 ee eee 80 Chapter 8 Multipart CUPS oc 83 R cordinga mMultipart cues morrison at S 84 Converting a standard cue to a multipart CUB 85 Wait times in multipart CUBS oooocooocooooooo 86 Editing a multipart CUGS si bis nates geen La bake nee Say 86 Deleting a part from a multipart cue o oo oo oooo 86 Adding deleting and modifying channels 87 Mo
101. GA monitors Remote Interface Remote Macros Dimmer feedback Worklights Size and weight e 35x 15x 6 inches e 21 pounds 270 Express User Manual appendix d reference This appendix lists most Express functions keys and softkeys in alphabet ical order Listings include a description and instructions or examples as appropriate for using it 272 Express User Manual A is softkey S2 in the Patch and Dimmer Monitoring Functions dis plays S2 A allows selection of the A output of a multiplex dimmer Example Patch Dimmer 1 S2 A Channel 6 Enter patches the A half of multiplex dimmer 1 s output to channel 6 Allfade An allfade cue forces all unused channels to zero intensity when you press Go and clears the other fader Allfade is useful for forcing an end cue when tracking channels Alternate Alternate is softkey S2 in the Attribute list of the Effect display Use S2 Alternate to program an effect that changes between positive and negative on each pass through the steps If the effect is positive the first pass will be positive the second negative the third positive etc If the effect is negative the first pass will be negative the second positive etc To cancel the Alternate attribute press S2 again And Use And to select more than one dimmer group or channel in a single statement Example Channel 1 And 5 And 8 At 7 5 sets channels 1 5 and 8 at 75 perce
102. Inserting a step 152 Express User Manual Steps All subroutine steps are either cue steps or style steps A cue step con tains an existing recorded cue The subroutine lets you change levels and fade rates for the cue step without changing the original cues A cue step may contain an effect cue A style step contains an instruction that controls the subroutine s playback pattern This allows you to run loops run bounces pause the subroutine until you press go or end the subroutine and jump to any other cue The next two pages describe the types of cue and style steps that are available Cue steps There are two types of cue step crossfade and allfade Crossfade In a crossfade step all increasing levels fade in the upfade time all decreasing levels fade in the downfade time Allfade In an allfade step all channels in both faders fade to a level that you choose and assign to the step chapter 13 subroutines 153 Style steps The following playback styles are available for subroutines A style is assigned to a step When the subroutine runs the steps play back in numeric order until the subroutine reaches a style step The style step then determines whether the subroutine will loop bounce hold or end and run a different cue Loop The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Loop step It then returns to the first step and repeats the sequence for the number of times you specify When you create the Loop
103. Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press S7 More Softkeys 3 Press S5 Insert Step Prompt reads Select step number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Use the T and J keys to Prompt reads highlight the step you wish to Select step number to insert insert then press ENTER or To cancel press CLEAR Enter the number of the step 5 Press Enter Prompt reads Select channel numbers Precede with AND to add to existing step or EXCEPT to delete from step 6 Enter desired channels and settings The new step is inserted in place of the old one The old step 5 becomes step 6 step 6 becomes step 7 and so on The timing and level attributes from step 4 are set as initial defaults in the new step 5 148 Deleting steps Express User Manual You may also delete steps from an effect For example to delete step 5 follow these instructions Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Cue 2 2 Press S7 More Soft keys 3 Press S6 Delete Step 4 Use the T and J keys to highlight step 5 Or Press 5 5 Press Enter or press Clear to cancel 6 Press Record Enter Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Select step number to delete then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects step 5 Prompt reads Select step number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Deletes step
104. MAStE S A 131 Loading cues or groups to submasters o o ooooooo 132 Copying cues or groups to submasters o oooooo 132 Clearing SUDMASterS o o oooo o oooo eee 133 Submiaster EISt ction A 2 eevee E ee 134 Editing attributes in Submaster LiSt 135 Chapter 12 Effects Aea A ic 137 A Ne Sete ads Eh DS oe A t Ie Sle Bh 138 Creating STPS cued nee a a Reng beens 139 Default element assignment 00 000 141 Controlling effects 2 0 eee 142 AMD adonde Sato a 142 Effect fade MES aee ve a Hee eS 144 Using a random rate 2 0 000222 eee 146 Modifying effects oa riie e ian i eee 147 Inserting SENS a es ta pele eet Ga kk 147 Deleting Steps ais A R 148 Editing step characteristics 0 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee 148 Running an effect CUG ee i den a eee 150 Using an effect Submaster nnana anaana 150 Chapter 13 Subroutines 22 oh Aches Pel ees wee Geese oak ba Blas 151 SN Gain PU E hie EE ccm NI 152 CUE SEPSA Yon eee 152 COSSA inet a hatte a eae eae ee hee e we e 152 ALTARS EE rra ete ed ie eb ge el SAG Ph es 152 SLVIE STEPS pta peste Fk ake e aa o dle ed de ANN doe sed 153 O ad os 153 BOUND tna 153 JUMP tO CUS 25 de cds as 153 HoldstO GO otitis sos tito dd dd da e Coat Deaf 153 Subroutine attributes ui ee eas EPEE eS 154 bevelo ae ae ees ee ane Renn eRe Sees sehen O 8 re 154 Fade time Siena ct dde ne rd done ES 154 FOMOW TIME es de oda ek Go alike td ee Secs a
105. MSC and to assign MSC device IDs for incoming and outgoing data do the following 1 Press Setup to go to the Setup menu 2 Press 6 Enter to select the Options Settings menu The following display appears 01 03 PM ETC MIDI Channel 12 MIDI Show Control Device IDs 122 7 5 DMX In Starting Channel Disabled Infrared Remote Disabled SMPTE Input Disabled SMPTE Frame gt Second 30 Display Cue SMPTE List Cue List Dimmer Monitor ing Disabled 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 s2 s3 84 s5 S6 S7 se PO IO ee ee 3 Press 2 Enter The message Select MIDI receiver device 0 126 or press DISABLE MIDI to disable MIDI Show Control ap pears 4 Enter the receiver device ID the ID of the device generating the MSC signal to which the console is listening The ID must be between zero and 126 5 Press Enter The message Select MIDI transmitter device 0 126 or press DISABLE MIDI to disable MIDI Show Control ap pears 6 Enter the transmitter device ID the ID of the device to which the con sole is transmitting MIDI signal The ID must be between zero and 126 Press Enter Disable MIDI Show Control To disable MIDI Show Control from the Options Settings menu press 2 Enter S1 Disable MIDI 220 Express User Manual MSC commands received by Express Express consoles enabled for MSC accept the following MSC commands When the console receives one of these commands it executes the com ma
106. NTE UCI ds rc 1 Using the trackpad ooooocooocoocc eee 2 Trackpad notesS sor RA eh Ps re ed See 2 SENSITIVITY ri de whe eae wee aaa 2 ATOUBIESMOOUMG a4 mari la da o Steel a Bis eta tue toes le ra 3 Using this Mantalie cn eet adie dete Das ue Deen eee eek 4 USING Hel Pssst ony ore Spe o Cae beat ee ts 4 TEX CONVENTIONS vases angi a a BR eae ee ae ee A 4 Output level COnVENtIONS ets s 54 25 nd nde be dea edd ee NG Rees 4 ABOUT SHOW a m ste Cree fe ey aes cena is on ias 5 Chapter 2 Monitor displays 00 0 0c ccs 7 Channel COOS tato ot do ue Bele BE hed ete Dota to Ate 8 changing pagas Pitas eee tad idle o tated ees dd a 8 Stagen m e E a E a L 9 EAU E epee N See E A E SR A E AEEA E ANT 10 Flexichannelie gt teat at ds ta a cia 11 Updating Flexichannel 0 0 0 0 0 0 cee eens 11 Pate O ON 12 Chapter 3 System settings ooooooooooooooooc 13 Setting number Of dimmers ba oben k eee eh aw Hey Bae tens 14 Setting number of channels 0 00 2000 0c wee eee ee 14 Setting default fade times 0 0 0 0 000 eee 15 Setting default Level a ok ee oie a ds 16 Setting default fader clear time 0 0 000 000 cee 16 Setting default Sneak time 2 0 eee 17 Enable disable Blackout key 20 20000002 ee eee 17 Enable disable Flexichannel ooooooooooooooooooo 18 Updating Flexichannel ni cnn a ap 18 Set Master ty Pes da dd e jad A ata 19 Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1
107. NTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press 1 Selects cue 1 Note The keypad defaults to cue mode when you press Record 7 Press Enter Records cue 1 containing chan nels 1 through 10 at 50 percent 8 Press Rel Releases captured channels chapter 6 cues 53 Working with cues in Blind mode Blind mode allows you to create preview or modify cues without affect ing the current look on stage If you prefer to work with live looks you should work in Stage mode When you press Blind Express displays the following screen Grandmaster 100 11 56 AM 001 02 03 04 OF 11 12 025 26 27 28 049 50 51 52 53 055 59 60 83 84 Fader A B Fader C D Clear Clear Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate 10 x 5 Toad exits 013 Cue Type 1 2 019 20 3 64 65 66 067 68 6 88 89 091 92 9 Wait Link Follow Rate m 3 Curtain up mn 6 1 2 Cue 3 4 5 6 Delete E Part List Rate Cue Follow 54 Express User Manual Recording a cue in Blind This example creates a cue in Blind mode Blind allows you to work on cues without affecting the look on stage Express automatically enters 00 for channels used in cue 1 to indicate that they will downfade in cue 2 Follow these steps to record cue 2 in Blind mode Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press 2 3 Press Channel 1 3 4 Press And 1 5 5 Press Full Action Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select cue number
108. Press any key to continue chapter 19 sensor dimming Clearing dimmer loads Clear Loads allows you to clear selected dimmer loads thus disabling 203 dimmer monitoring for those dimmers This can be useful if you know that the load on a dimmer or group of dimmers will change over the course of a show and don t want to receive load error messages every time it hap pens To clear loads follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Select 9 ETCLink Func tions and press Enter Select 4 Load Manage ment and press Enter Press S6 Clear Loads If you wish you may enter a specific dimmer or dim mers to clear Press 0 Enter Press Enter to proceed with the load clear or press Clear to cancel the opera tion Action Selects Setup display Selects ETCLink Functions menu Selects Load Management display Prompt reads To clear loads select dim mer s and press ENTER Enter 0 to clear loads for all dimmers Advisory reads Recorded loads will be erased for all dimmers with levels above zero disabling load error messages for those dim mers Press Enter to proceed or press Clear to cancel Loads are cleared for all dimmers with levels above zero Once complete advisory reads Clear Loads processing has completed Press any key to continue 204 Express User Manual Load errors When a dimmer s load isn t within 20 percent of its recorded load it gen
109. RJ45 connector Twisted Pair or the DB15 connector ThickNet install only jumpers 7 through 12 Be certain jumpers 1 through 6 are not installed 6 Jumper 13 must always be off Jumper 14 should always be installed 7 Locate the DIP switches at location 1 on the corner of the circuit board nearest the power switch Switches are either On Closed or Off Open DIP switch 1 must be Off and 2 must be On or the Remote Interface will not start Adjust the settings as necessary to match the table below DIP Switch Position Function 1 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 2 On Closed Normal operation Factory Use Only 3 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 4 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 5 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 6 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 7 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 8 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 8 Close the face panel and replace the screws 9 The Remote Interface checks DIP switch settings when it is turned on Restart the unit for new DIP switch settings to take effect 256 Express User Manual Installing Remote Video Interface ETCNet Remote Video Interface back panel The Remote Video Interface allows you to attach Express peripherals to your network Each Remote Video Interface contains connectors for three types of network cable Choose the connector that matches your network cable type To insta
110. Setup display Selects System Settings menu Menu indicates current status of Record Lockout Prompt reads Enable Disable record lockout 1 Enable 0 Disable Record is locked out If you attempt to record anything the prompt reads Record is locked out Press CLEAR to continue Note As always the best way to safeguard your show is to make back ups See Chapter 17 Diskette functions for instructions on backing up a show to diskette Enable disable Bump keys Express s submaster bump buttons may be enabled or disabled Express defaults to enabled Follow these steps to enable or disable all submaster bump buttons Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter Select 1 4 Bump keys and press Enter Press 1 or 0 Press Enter Action Selects Setup display Selects System Settings menu Prompt reads Enable disable bump keys 1 Enable 0 Disable Corner reads BpStat 1 Or BpStat 0 Submaster bump buttons are enabled or disabled Express User Manual Setting clock To set the current time and date in your system follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press S2 Set Clock The following screen appears 3 Enter the current time in New time appears on screen hours and minutes Time entry format corresponds to your clock mode setting in System Settings In 24 hour format 930
111. System to clear all data from console and reset all set tings to factory defaults Return Return is softkey S8 in numerous displays Use S8 Return to return to the previous display Reverse Reverse is softkey S3 in the Blind Effect Attribute display Use S3 Reverse to cause the effect step list to run in reverse order beginning with the last recorded step To cancel the reverse attribute press S3 again Right Arrow Press gt to move through various displays such as Stage Blind effects and macro mode Select Cue Select Cue is softkey S3 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Sub routine display Press S3 Select Cue to create or edit a fade step in a subroutine cue Select Dimmer Select Dimmer is softkey S5 in the Dimmer Status display Use S5 Select Dimmer to select a specific dimmer on the Dimmer Status display appendix d reference 293 Select Group Select Group is softkey S1 in the Blind Group display Use S1 Select Group to specify which group to edit or view Example Blind Group S1 Select Group 6 Enter brings up group 6 for editing Select Macro Select Macro is softkey S1 in the Macro Editing display Use S1 Select Macro to access a macro for recording or editing Example S1 Select Macro 6 Enter selects macro 6 Select Rack Select Rack is softkey S6 in the Rack Status display Use S6 Select Rack to select a specific rack on the Rack
112. UDPATOW sap Sine Aw in aes tra 298 Up Down Folow seo na raain e a a Bae 299 Update Srina aaan aa ee a A OAE ee a ee n a A 299 WE arta a ale EVA i Se fo A oaks Matte da este hos aAa EA ct 299 Appendix E BOMKOYS 1 2 mesana Da oie errr e ne at art a e Bi on id 301 12 Express User Manual chapter 1 introduction This manual provides instructions for installing and using ETC s Express 125 and Express 250 lighting control consoles In all cases operation of both consoles is identical The only difference between the two consoles is the number of channels each can control 125 or 250 Throughout the manual both consoles are referred to as Express If one is specifically indi cated its full name is used This chapter includes information to orient you to the console and the manual It includes the following sections e Troubleshooting e Using this manual e Using Help e Text conventions e Output level conventions e About Show Express User Manual Using the trackpad Use the Express trackpad to set rates and levels The trackpad operates in three modes single mode double mode and XY mode described below You can also set the trackpad s sensitivity Single mode Most of the time the trackpad is in single mode If the con sole prompts you for a rate or a level moving your finger up on the trackpad increases the rate or level Moving it down decreases the rate or level Double mode f you use the Link List f
113. Y channel 1 Yes 0 No N gl 236 Express User Manual 6 Press 1 gt gt Sets both channels as independent Prompt reads Select channel number s 7 Press S7 Link List Selects Link List display Prompt reads Select link number 8 Press 3 Enter Selects link 3 Prompt reads Select X channel number Pre cede with AND to add to exist ing link or EXCEPT to delete from link 9 Press 4 And 1 4 gt The pan control channels are assigned to the link s X list Prompt reads Select Y channel number Precede with AND to add to existing link or EXCEPT to delete from link 10 Press 5 And 1115 The tilt control channels are Enter assigned to the link s Y list Prompt reads Select fixture type then press ENTER 1 XY position 0 other 11 Press 1 gt The link sets the trackpad to XY mode Link entry is complete To test the moving lights setup press Stage select channels 4 and 14 and move both wheels together chapter 21 moving lights 237 Using groups and Only with Link List Only allows you to select several groups and then adjust only the channels the groups have in common Used in conjunction with Link List this becomes a particularly powerful feature For example say you are work ing with the moving lights groups described in Only on page 113 In that example each of the first four groups contains six channels corre sponding to pan tilt intensit
114. Y list are controlled by the Y axis on the trackpad Channels that control movement of moving lights or color scrollers will often be set as Independent This assures that in the case of a blackout or Grandmaster movement the current position of the moving light will not change For more information about Independent channels see page 38 chapter 21 moving lights 231 Trackpad modes The trackpad operates in three modes single mode double mode and XY mode described below Single mode Most of the time the trackpad is in single mode If the console prompts you for a rate or a level moving your finger up on the trackpad increases the rate or level Moving it down decreases the rate or level Double mode If you use the Link List function to link two or more channels and then select any linked channel the trackpad automatically switches into double mode In double mode the trackpad is divided into two regions The left side controls channels in the X half of the link colored gold on the display The right side controls channels in the Y half of the link colored yellow on the display Move your finger up or down on either side to control channel levels in the corresponding link XY mode If you use the Link List function to link two or more channels and set the link s position attribute for XY position then select any linked channel with that attribute the trackpad automatically switches into XY mode In XY mode move your finge
115. aced Press any key to continue 096 97 98 03 04 Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Label 1 Xx 5 3 4 s5 S6 S7 8 E pam Rate Quickstep See ETCLink errors on page 264 for a list of possible error messages 1 212 Express User Manual Disabling secondary messages You may prevent secondary ETCLink advisory messages from being dis played while you are operating the console This is done from the ETCLink Functions menu For example if you are rehanging a show a large number of load errors will be generated despite the fact that nothing is actually wrong Under these circumstances you might want to turn off the secondary messages until the show is completely rehung and the new loads have been recorded This would allow the board operator to use the console uninter rupted Note See page 265 for a list of secondary messages To disable advisories follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 3 Select 6 Display Adviso Prompt reads ries and press Enter Enable disable display of ETCLink advisories 1 Enable all 2 Enable fatal error advisories only 0 Disable 4 Press 0 Enter All ETCLink advisories are dis abled to enable advisories follow the same steps but select 1 or 2 in step 4 chapter 2O control Interfaces Express allows you to control your console and or
116. ade the old submaster 120 Express User Manual Submaster bump buttons A bump button is located immediately below each submaster slider The bump button s function depends on its status see below and on whether the submaster has a programmed fade If the submaster does not have a programmed fade the bump button allows you to bring up the submaster s contents on stage instantly Press the bump button to raise the submaster to its full recorded level Hold the button to maintain the levels on stage Release the button to remove the submaster s levels If the submaster has a programmed fade the bump button allows you to start the fade or to reverse the direction of an ongoing fade Press the bump button to start the upfade Press the button again to interrupt the upfade and start the downfade Bump button status Submaster bump buttons may be individually enabled disabled or placed in Solo mode An enabled bump button functions normally a disabled button doesn t function at all and a button in Solo mode brings its chan nels to their recorded level and reduces all other channels to zero If a submaster s bump button is disabled or in Solo mode a D or an S appear next to the submaster s number on the Submaster List and the Status Bar To seta bump button s status follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Sub 5 Selects submaster 5 3 Press S1 Bump Status Prompt re
117. ads Record Lockout You may set the console to disable the Record function This protects a finished show from inadvertent changes To disable the Record function in your system press Setup 1 Enter 1113 Enter 1 Enter Recorded channels Recorded channels are channel levels that have been recorded in a cue group or submaster In Stage mode recorded levels are displayed in green or magenta Recorded channels may be either moving or tracked in Blind mode Channel levels controlled by effects are displayed in white Except for effect submasters channel levels controlled by submasters are displayed in yellow Channel levels set by channel sliders are displayed in gold 292 Express User Manual Release Use Rel to release selected captured and independent channels from the control of the keypad in Stage Blind or Tracksheet modes First press releases any selected channels second releases captured channels and third releases independent channels Example Channel 5 At 7 5 Rel sets channel 5 at 75 percent then releases it Replace Insert Insert Replace is softkey S2 in the Macro Editing displays Press S2 Insert Replace to change the editing mode of the macro dis play Replace Mode overwrites macro entries and Insert Mode inserts new entries before the currently selected entry displayed in yellow Reset System Reset System is softkey S1 in the Clear Functions display Use S1 Reset
118. ads Select bump status and press ENTER 1 enabled 2 disabled 3 solo 4 Press 2 Selects disabled The keypad corner indicates the choice you have made 5 Press Enter Submaster 5 s bump button is disabled chapter 11 submasters 121 Recording submasters You can create submasters in Live or Blind mode Follow these steps to record a simple pile on submaster Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Select channels and set Creates look channel levels 3 Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Sub 5 Enter The current stage look is Olen recorded into Submaster 5 Press Submaster 5 s bump button Note Use Solo to record specific channels into the submaster rather than the full stage look For example 5 Thru 1110 S7 More Softkeys S8 Solo Record Sub 5 Enter records only the current levels of channels 5 through 10 in submaster 5 regardless of what other channel levels may be up on stage Fade and dwell times for submasters Normally pressing a sub bump brings channel levels to their recorded level immediately If you prefer you can record submasters with fades Express provides a submaster upfade time downfade time and dwell time Upfade time is the length of time it takes a submaster s channels to fade to their recorded levels when the submaster bump button Is pressed Dwell time
119. alled groups You may record up to 500 groups Once you record a group it can be combined with other channels to create cues submasters effects or other groups The principal difference between a group and a cue Is that a group cannot be played back through a fader or slider Consequently it has no fade times wait times or other playback attributes Group numbers are independent of cue numbers and may be numbered from 1 to 999 Group Use Group to select record or recall a proportional group of channels Cues and submasters may also be recalled as groups Example Record Group 1 Enter records the current look as group 1 Example Group Cue 3 at 5 0 brings up the channels in cue 3 as a group and sets them to 50 percent of their recorded levels Group Editing mode In Group Editing mode Express brings up the selected group itself and allows you to modify it In this mode use S1 Select Group rather than Group to bring up a different group Use Group to access a group s levels as you modify the selected group Group mode In Group mode Express brings up the channels from a group of your choice and allows you to use them to modify cues and submasters Group List Group List is softkey S2 in the Blind Group display Use S2 Group List to access the Group List display which provides a list of recorded groups and their labels Help Press Help followed by any key to receive a brief descripti
120. anual Group Editing mode To enter Group Editing mode and modify a recorded group follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Group 1 Selects group 1 s channels Prompt reads Group mode To recall a group select the number and set it to a level To create or modify a group select the number and press ENTER 3 Press Enter Selects group 1 Group status bar appears above softkeys Channel levels are white Prompt reads Select channel numbers 4 Add delete or modify channels as desired 5 Press Record Enter Records the modified group 1 Note Once you are in Group Editing mode use S1 Select Group rather than Group to bring up a different group Use Group to access another group s levels as you modify the selected group chapter 10 groups 105 Modifying groups Express allows you to modify groups in Stage or Blind modes In Blind Follow these steps to add channels to a group in Blind display mode Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Group Prompt reads Group mode To recall a group select the number and set it to a level 3 Press 1 Selects group 1 s channels Corner reads Group 1 4 Press Enter Brings up group 1 in group edit ing mode Channel levels should be white Prompt reads Select channel numbers Warning You must press Enter after you enter the group number If you do not
121. bels Softkey then reads Show Labels System Status System Status is softkey S4 in the Rack Status and Dimmer Status displays Use S4 System Status to check information about your Sensor dim ming system including system firing mode current backup look status ETCLink errors and system configuration Thru Use Thru to select a continuous group of dimmers or channels Example Channel 1 Thru 5 And 8 At 7 5 sets channel 1 through 5 and channel 8 to 75 percent Time Use Time to enter upfade and downfade times for cues and submasters Example Cue 6 Time 5 Enter 1 0 sets cue 6 s upfade to five sec onds and its downfade to ten seconds Example Cue 7 Time 3 Time 5 Enter sets cue 7 s upfade to three seconds and its downfade to five seconds 298 Express User Manual Track Use Track to record channel levels that are to be tracked into subsequent cues Example Cue 5 Track Enter tracks channels from cue 5 into follow ing cues Tracked channels A tracked channel is a channel whose level is unchanged from the preced ing cue Tracked channels are displayed in magenta Type Use Type to select the fade type for a cue or the submaster type for a submaster Example Blind Cue 4 Type 3 Enter makes cue 4 an effect cue Example Blind Sub 6 Type 2 Enter makes submaster 6 inhibitive Type Level Type Level is softkey S4 after S7 M
122. between 7 PM and 9 PM on Monday and Wednesday Or you might want to warm the filaments of your studio instruments 15 minutes prior to your news program You can record up to 500 real time programs This section includes instructions for creating and editing real time programs See System Set tings for instructions on setting the real time clock Real time programs The system will run recorded macros at specific times on specified days Real time programs must be enabled before they will function Enabling real time programs To enable or disable real time programs follow these steps Default is enabled Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display mode 2 Press 6 Enter Selects Options Settings menu 3 Press 1 1 Enter Selects Real Time Programs Prompt reads Enable Disable real time pro grams 1 enable 0 disable 4 Press 1 Enter Enables Real Time Programs Note To disable Real Time programs repeat procedure and enter zero in step 4 chapter 20 control interfaces 223 Creating real time programs Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 1 2 Enter Press S1 Select Pro gram 1 Enter Press 8 0 0 Enter Press 1 And 3 Thru 5 Enter Press 5 Enter Action Selects Setup display mode Selects Real Time Programs display Prompt reads Enter time 12 hour clock Press to enter AM or PM Enters time to run macro Prompt reads
123. bmaster List 134 135 Time 130 Types 116 Update 129 Use as group 111 Subroutine 48 151 297 Allfade cue steps 152 275 Attributes Follow time 154 Level 154 Bounce style steps 153 273 Creating 155 Crossfade cue steps 152 275 Cue steps 275 Deleting step 157 Down 299 Editing 157 Follow 299 Hold for go style steps 153 284 Inserting step 157 Jump to cue style steps 153 284 Level 298 Loop style steps 153 285 Steps 152 295 Style steps 153 296 Type 298 Up 299 Suppress Labels 297 System configuration 247 System settings 13 Default fade time 15 Default Fader Clear Time 16 Default level 16 Default Sneak Time 17 Flexichannel 18 Number of channels 14 Number of dimmers 14 Record Lockout 20 291 Set Channels Subs 1 to 1 19 index Set date 22 Setting Clock 22 Time format 20 System Status 205 297 T Technical Services 3 Text conventions 4 Thru 297 Tilt 234 Time 22 297 Default Sneak 17 Effect fade time 144 Effect In Dwell Out time 138 Effect Up Dwell Down 144 145 Follow time 59 Format 20 Macro Wait 162 Set system 22 Submaster 121 125 Wait 57 Wait time in multipart cue 86 Timed fader 91 Track 49 73 74 75 298 Tracked channels 36 298 Troubleshooting 3 Type 298 Changing sub 117 Cue 48 Submaster 116 Type Level 298 U Unload submaster 133 Unpatching dimmers 298 Unset Dimmer 208 298 Up Arrow 298 Up Down Follow 299 Update 299 Cue 64 65 Flexichannel 11 41 Groups 107 Rate 66 Subma
124. ch Clear Show and Patch erases all information associated with a specific show from your console s memory including patch information and system configuration information To erase a full show and patch follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 5 Clear Showand Prompt reads To clear show Patch Enter and patch press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Show cleared Returns to Stage display mode 190 Express User Manual Macros Clear Macros erases all macro information from a show To erase all macros follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 8 Clear Macros Prompt reads Enter To clear macros press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Macros cleared Returns to Setup menu Reset 1 to 1 Patch Reset Patch 1 to 1 resets your console s patch to a one to one patch Thus channel 1 is patched to dimmer 1 channel 2 is patched to dimmer 2 and so on This function is independent of your show It does not clear label level or profile settings See Chapter 5 Patch for more information about patch To clear all patch information includi
125. cifications 269 Proportional patching 26 Purge Flexi 11 41 290 Q Quickstep 97 290 R Rack Status 206 290 Random 290 Random Rate 146 290 Range edit Effect steps 141 Group List 71 Submaster List 135 Rate 291 Override 96 Random rate 146 Rate fader 290 Submaster 125 130 Submasters 130 Update 66 Record 291 Cue 49 54 55 57 Cue w split fade time 56 Effect as cue 150 Follow 58 59 Group minus sub 101 Groups 100 Loads 200 Record Backup 291 Record Lockout 20 Recorded channels 36 Show to diskette 172 Solo 62 Sub minus sub 126 Submasters 120 121 130 Track 49 Record Loads 291 Record Lockout 291 Recorded channels 291 Release 292 Remote Focus Unit 194 Remote Interfaces 253 260 Remote macros 226 261 317 318 Pinout 261 Remote video 260 Remote Video Interface 256 DIP switch settings 257 258 Replace Insert 292 Reset patch 190 Reset System 192 292 Return 292 Reverse 292 RFU 194 251 Connector 251 Installation 251 Pinout 251 Right Arrow 292 S Select Cue 90 292 Select Dimmer 292 Select Group 293 Select Macro 293 Select Rack 293 Selected channels 36 293 Selecting channels 40 Sensor 33 197 199 Backup looks 209 System status 205 Set Channel levels 35 44 Clock 22 293 Date 22 Default fade time 15 Default fader clear time 16 Default level 16 Default Sneak Time 17 Dimmer 208 Dimmer levels 30 Record Lockout 291 Set Dimmer 293 System settings 13 Time 22 Time format 20 Setup 294 Show Clear
126. corded group on stage follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Stage Press Group 2 Press Full Adjust channel levels as desired Press Rel to release the group s chan nels Action Selects Stage display mode Selects group 2 Prompt reads Group mode Select group number to use as group Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel or trackpad to alter lev els or select channel numbers to edit chapter 10 groups 103 Working with groups in Blind There are two group modes in Blind Group mode and Group Editing mode In Group mode Express brings up the channels from a group of your choice and allows you to use them to modify cues submasters and other groups In Group Editing mode Express brings up the selected group itself and allows you to modify it Group mode To enter Group mode and bring up a group s channels follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Group 1 Selects group 1 s channels Prompt reads Group mode To recall a group select the number and set it to a level To create or modify a group select the number and press ENTER 3 Press At 7 5 Sets the channels to 75 percent of their recorded levels Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel to alter levels or select channel num bers to edit 4 Press Record Cue 3 Records the current level set Enter tings as cue 3 104 Express User M
127. ctor you use will depend on what kind of wiring your location has installed For more information about wiring choices see the ETCNet Planning and Installation Guide To attach Express to the ETCNet network insert the connector at the con sole end of the network cable into the console connector Attach other devices to the interface device as described in the appropriate sections of this manual If you are using Twisted Pair wiring it may be necessary to change your twisted pair polarity Press Setup 6 Enter 1 2 Enter to select the polarity If you are using an external concentrator or null concentrator set the polarity to Not Swapped If not set the polarity to Swapped For more information see the ETCNet Planning and Installation Guide 254 Express User Manual Installing Remote Interfaces Remote Interfaces allow you to attach Express peripherals to your net work Each Remote Interface contains connectors for three types of net work cable ThinNet ThickNet and Twisted Pair Choose the connector that matches your cable type To install the Remote Interface follow these steps 1 Plug the network connector into the appropriate back panel connector 2 Plug the power cable into a grounded 120 VAC outlet The Remote Interface back panel contains connectors for up to two mon itors the connector labeled CRT 1 is active three DMX512 outputs and an RFU The illustration below shows the Remote Interface s back panel
128. cue number Prompt reads Select cue number 2 Press S2 Part thenenter Selects part number the part number Prompt reads Select part number 3 Press Wait 1 0 Selects wait time of ten seconds Prompt reads Enter wait time 4 Press Enter Sets wait time for the part to ten seconds Part will wait ten sec onds then run Editing a multipart cue Once you have created a multipart cue you can add or delete parts add or delete channels from the parts change channel levels or change fade and wait times Deleting a part from a multipart cue Follow these steps to delete a part from a multipart cue in Blind Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Cue 4 S1 Part Prompt reads 1 Select part number 3 Press S6 Delete Part Prompt reads To delete part press ENTER Delete part amp tracking press TRACK ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press Enter Deletes part 1 from cue 4 Note If channels in your cue are tracking removing a part may affect sub sequent cues Press Track after you enter the part number and before you press Enter This removes channels from subsequent cues if they track from this cue part chapter 8 multipart cues 87 Adding deleting and modifying channels Follow these steps to edit channels in a multipart cue Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Sel
129. d press CLEAR CLEAR for manual operation 5 Use keypad to enter dwell Prompt reads time and press Time Enter downfade time See next page for infor mation about using a Hold dwell 6 Use keypad to enter down New fade times are recorded fade time and press into submaster 5 Enter Note Once a timed submaster is running press the bump button to change the direction of the fade For example if the upfade is half fin ished pressing the bump button starts the downfade from 50 percent If a downfade is running pressing the bump button begins an upfade again from the current level chapter 11 submasters Hold dwell time 123 If you record a submaster with a dwell time of Hold the submaster fades up when you press the bump button then holds until you press it again To add a dwell time of Hold to a submaster follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Sub 2 Press 5 3 Press Time Time 4 Press Clear 5 Press Enter Enter Action Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Selects submaster 5 Corner reads Sub 5 Prompt reads Enter dwell time Press CLEAR for hold press CLEAR CLEAR for manual operation Corner reads Dwell Hold Dwell time is set to Hold for submaster 5 124 Express User Manual Manual dwell time If you record a submaster with a dwell time of manual and an upfade time other than zero the upfade starts when you press
130. d back and is in a fader Express sets the channel at the higher of the two levels You may then use the keypad to select that channel and set it to any level regardless of the levels set by the cue and the submas ter chapter 1 introduction 5 About Show About Show provides you with memory usage information regarding the currently loaded show It tells you how many channels and dimmers your show is configured for and how many of the available cues submasters groups macros and SMPTE events you are using It also indicates the per centage of the console s available memory used for each function Press About Enter to display the About Show window Note There is not enough memory to record the maximum number of all functions at the same time Use About Show to monitor your memory usage as the complexity of your show increases If you fill the available memory you can reclaim it by clearing cues groups subs macros or events that you are no longer using About Show Label The Garden Plot Number of channels 96 Number of dimmers 1024 Recorded Y Memory Remaining Cues 21 24 579 Subs 23 47 3 17193 Groups 7 Ox 493 Macros 15 0 1985 Sustem etup 7 Memory left The Memory left indicator shows you how much console memory is still available to record additional functions Express allows you to record up to 600 cues 500 groups 2 000 macros and 3 000 SMPTE events as avail able memory permits Note The
131. dding channels for each part you want to include in the multipart cue Action Selects Stage display mode The Prompt reads Select channel numbers Indicates that you want to record a cue Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Enters the part number to record Prompt reads Select part number to record To cancel press CLEAR Records subsequent parts Maxi mum number of parts is eight Note You do not need to re enter the cue number for additional parts Set channel levels press Record Part enter the part number and press Enter Note Follow Link and Label attributes may be assigned to the overall cue chapter 8 multipart cues 85 Converting a standard cue to a multipart cue If you have already created a single part cue Express allows you to recon figure it as a multipart cue You can convert a standard cue to a multipart cue in either Stage or Blind mode As you break the cue into parts to convert it to a multipart cue Express automatically creates cue part 8 Any channels not included in the first recorded part are assigned to part 8 automatically As channels are assigned to new parts they are deleted from part 8 automatically Press Channel 1 Thru 2 0 Full Record 1 Enter This creates a standard cue 1 containing channels 1 through 20 at Full The following example divides this cue into four parts numbered 1 2 3 and 8 each containing f
132. den i nra p e a Aue been aa 282 Hold fad SR erica a Pn eee ee A 283 Hold for Go Subroutine nasaan aaaea 283 INDWell QUE ee cad cen a ae de ae ta ash tet Gee at do 283 Independent Da 283 Independent channels anaana naana 283 Inhibitive SUMAS ica a Gea GA Ae wo 283 Insert R6places 2 asks det tetas ta bate oad 284 INSET STEP ck wy eet aia Sa oe ees Dean ae ee Bd 284 Jump to cue Subroutine n asasan eee 284 Keypad Numbers ooo 284 Last Pages 90 6 cats ista tole eh At pad era 284 ERAS e Yaw va wanes Ue oa aa OMS 284 LOTA at ll ashe Wak ee A tee GEE 284 A at aes nn tear rte hae tas huh ete Bava Ns A ben eee oa Deak 285 LINKS got setae date A a tls oat a raed 285 OAR CHECK erod ura aot eee a Aas Don aes 285 LOWIHI0O is e ta ean ct Pa ae ee eee 285 Loop ASUME a a OMe eee 285 MI M8xu i842 mine nut ai pto a DAA eo ee Bo 285 ME e a td ad 286 Macro cal n ta tal ase 286 Macro Walt dices otra o iaa Ad 286 Manuals snan h e ad a patas datada Ed 286 MINUS a rs il Ae ee ae 286 More DONKEYS acie n tica aa 286 Moving channe l s 4c0544 rn gee Ia eee A A 287 Multipart cue occ enue scar hehe dt annak bead eo he 287 Multiplex carita le wate Ue pad Shae OMS 287 Next Page dog ey neds aid Ve ee a is 287 OPSUBSBUMP dto oe ee ae ae 287 OM SUB BUMPs cito pa tie gpa o paw eed 288 Gin en ere A EE Ta 288 Express User Manual PC anes ooo DE NA eae eA 288 Pale tie tie 0s Ort a te She eRe Ae Oe wos eh E 288 A tes Av Ma ake ap
133. difying fade and wait times 000005 88 Chapter 9 Playing back CUCS 10 bi a Hck ae Aes a Ae oe il Ne 89 Selecting CU sa reales okey oats cunt erat 90 Timed tader Sedeo bd een dn il GOs hoe 91 clearing aders nt ke Mae td OB 91 CUS LIS tinaa a a eat A A A die Me taltie ne a al Peale 92 Fader Status display 20 20 0 0 cece eae 92 Selecting and playing a cue 1 6 eee 93 GO hyd nn oes a See ROY aada AA 94 A O 94 DA e Se ite TA ato di 94 Go to a different Gue ieee eee 94 Controlling fades manually 2 ee 95 Manual OYE econ i ake gd ee a led tals 95 RateiOVeMmlOGs s oa ita E A Seah Pe aoe 96 QUICKSTED 4 20 ai aae Gb a a dhe oA ae dll wk ra 97 4 Express User Manual Chapter 10 OT OUD os dee nectar hen eae elie Seek Bd er ENA ee Bt 99 GrEATINGLQLOUDS2 S55 tit deh os AU ew Ree Rk arte Lda 100 Creating a group from the look on stage 100 Creating a group using Solo 2 0 2 cee eee 101 Displaying groups On Stage 6 eee 102 Working with groups in Blind 2220000000 103 GOURD MOS eed glad Suse paride use la pe 103 Group Editing mode 0 6 eee 104 Modifying QrOUpS sua cc beg ee e ed eed doe oh es 105 I Buia pth sets 0S 0B nye Ath see A A stat Uda 105 I StaGG are cine ee eth OMe GP A Lee ale dec 106 Using Update to modify groups 0 0 0 0 0 2 eee 107 Deleting grups ebrios GRR Aes 109 COPVING GlOUDS 224 100 o de a ce tad ds A he A a 110 Usi
134. dimmer 1 Dim 1 3 Press At Prompt reads Select dimmer level Press FULL button for 100 4 Press 7 5 to set the dim Prompt reads mer s level at 75 percent To unpatch dimmer for You may also press Fulll or dimmer check press ENTER Level to set the dimmer at To park or unpark dimmer s 100 percent or at the press PARK Level setting 5 Press Enter Dimmer 1 is set at 75 percent Dimmer Check window appears Prompt reads Press or to step through dimmers Press Clear to cancel dimmer check 6 Press to select dimmer Dimmer 1 returns to zero 2 Repeat as necessary dimmer 2 is set at 75 percent Press Clear to end dimmer check Note If a dimmer is parked the Dimmer Check window displays the level at which it is parked The Dimmer Check does not change its level on stage Note To check a multiplexed B dimmer enter the number selecting the A dimmer then press to select the B dimmer chapter 4 patch 31 About About provides you with information about dimmers The following pages describe the use of About Dimmer and the information available in the About Dimmer window Note See page 45 for information on using About Channel About Dimmer About Dimmer provides attribute and status information for a selected dimmer To display the About Dimmer window follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press About Dimmer Prompt reads About Select dimmer number then press ENTER
135. dimmers in multiplex mode function as normal dimmers e Backup looks indicates whether a backup look is active and if so which one e ETCLink displays any ETCLink errors e System wide panic displays status of system wide panic e Error on rack displays the number of the rack with an ETCLink error If errors exist on multiple racks the first rack with an error is dis played e Racks on line displays the number of racks presently on line through out the ETCLink network e Racks in configuration displays the total number of racks in the sys tem 206 Express User Manual Dimmer rack status The Rack Status display provides information about specified dimmer racks including rack type starting address port information voltage fre quency and ambient temperature Press Setup 9 Enter 2 Enter to access the Rack Status display Press S6 Select Rack Enter to select a specific rack to select the next rack or to view the previous rack 03 52 PM Rack 5 Rack Type Start Address Port A Type Rack Frequency Ambient Temperature 2 3 S4 5 S6 8 8 System Dimmer Select Status Status Rack Return e Rack type displays the type of Sensor rack this rack is Possible rack types include SR6 SR12 SR24 SR48 SP6 SP12 SP24 SP48 and may be followed by AF if the rack is equipped with Sensor s Advanced Features option e Start address displays the lowest dimmer number in the rack e Port A B t
136. e non consecutive groups of channels For example Channel 1 Thru 5 And 8 Thru 1112 Except 9 selects channels 1 2 3 4 5 8 10 11 and 12 Hint If no channels are selected press Enter to select all channels cur rently at a level above zero Once you have entered your channel selections you are ready to set chan nel levels chapter 5 setting channel levels 41 Selecting channels in Flexichannel mode In Flexichannel mode only channels that are used in the show appear on the Stage Blind and Fader displays When Flexichannel mode is enabled the Thru key functions slightly differently For example in normal mode pressing 1 Thru 5 selects all channels from 1 to 5 In Flexichannel mode pressing 1 Thru 5 selects all visible channels from 1 to 5 To select all channels from 1 to 5 including channels that haven t been used in the show so far press 1 Thru Thru 5 Pressing Thru a second time alerts the system to ignore Flexichannel for that channel selection Note When channels that were used in a show are removed from the show they remain on the channel list until it is updated The Purge Flexi softkey on the System Settings display updates the list of used channels The list is also updated when you load a show from diskette or when you first turn Flexichannel on Press Setup 1 Enter S1 Purge Flexi to update Flexichannel displays 42 Express User Manual Setting c
137. e to run macro 10 press M 1 0 Enter To play a macro without its own key follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Press M and enter the Prompt reads Select macro macro number number then press ENTER 3 Press Enter Macro runs prompt shows sequence of activity as if you were entering the keystrokes Canceling a macro To cancel a running macro press any other macro key Powerup macro You may select a macro to run automatically each time you turn your con sole on To do so follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects the Setup menu 2 Press 6 Enter Selects the Options Settings menu 3 Press 1 0 Enter Selects the Powerup Macro option Prompt reads Select powerup macro number Enter 0 to dis able 4 Press 2 0 Enter Selects macro 20 as your pow erup macro Each time you turn on the console macro 20 runs 166 Express User Manual Modifying macros Editing mode In the Macro mode display you can edit macros in Insert or Replace modes In Insert mode if you highlight a keystroke and type another key stroke Express inserts the new keystroke before the highlighted one In Replace mode if you highlight a keystroke and type another keystroke Express replaces the highlighted keystroke with the new one To switch from Insert mode to Replace mode press S2 Replace To switch from Replace mode to Insert mode p
138. e end of the chase all steps are On they all turn Off to start the next pass In a negative effect all steps are On at the beginning of the chase Each step turns its assigned elements Off and leaves previous step elements Off At the end of the chase all elements are Off they all turn On to start the next pass S6 Random A Random effect plays steps back in random order Random is ideal for creating lightning flashing or strobe effects chapter 12 effects 143 Assigning attributes Follow these steps to assign attributes to the effect you created in the previous example Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press S7 More Soft Displays attributes across the keys S8 Attribute bottom of the screen Prompt reads Select effect attributes 3 Select attributes from the Selected patterns are displayed softkeys on the screen at the top of the effects display Note To remove an attribute select It again Express User Manual Effect fade times Each effect has an overall upfade dwell and downfade time When you create an effect cue the times default to the cue fade times in your system settings If you have not changed the default settings this means an upfade of five seconds a dwell of hold and a downfade of five sec onds See Setting default fade times on page 15 Time allows the user to set the upfade dwell and downfade time for the overall effect No
139. e next cue you have two options for speeding up to the next cue If you do not need the current cue to reach its full intensity level settings press Go to inter rupt the current cue and begin the next one However if you need the cur rent cue to reach its full level settings push the sliders down to the lit LEDs and then back up to 10 immediately Then press Go to start the next cue Once the fade is complete the cue is no longer controlled by the fader Express User Manual Rate override Manual override allows you to control both the fade s rate and percentage of completion When you play back a cue using rate override the console controls the percentage of completion but you control the rate Rate override allows you to play back a cue faster or slower than the rate at which it was recorded The trackpad adjusts the fade rate Fade rate is expressed as a percentage A cue with a fade rate of 100 per cent plays back at its recorded fade time A fade rate of 300 plays the cue back three times faster than its recorded fade time A fade rate of 50 plays the cue back half as fast as its recorded fade time For example if you record a cue with a 10 second fade time a rate of 200 causes it to play back in five seconds A fade rate of 50 causes it to play back in 20 sec onds You may take control of a cue s fade rate while the cue is running In addi tion you may press both Rate keys to control rate of both fades Follow
140. e of 15 seconds Note If the cue already exists you may omit steps 8 and 9 chapter 6 cues 57 Recording a cue with a wait time Wait time is the time that elapses between when you press Go and when the actual fade begins You can record Express cues with a wait time of up to 99 59 minutes Express allows you to program a wait time for either the upfade or the downfade not both If you do not enter a wait time Express assigns the cue a wait time of zero Follow these steps to record a cue with a downfade wait time Keystrokes T 2 Press Stage or Blind Press Cue Press 5 Press Wait once or Press Wait twice Press 6 Press Enter Action Selects display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Selects cue 5 Prompt reads Enter upfade wait time or Enter downfade wait time Enters a wait time of six seconds Corner reads UpWait 6 Or DnWait 6 Records cue 5 with wait time of six seconds Express User Manual Recording cues with Link and Follow When you record a cue it automatically becomes part of the Cue List The Cue List is a list of all cues organized in numeric sequence Normally when you press Go to execute cues Express plays them back in the sequence in which they appear in the Cue List Link allows you to modify the sequence in which cues play back Follow allows you to play back multiple cues automatically
141. e the Contents of submaster 2 are submaster or Clear to cleared cancel the action 134 Express User Manual Submaster List The Submaster List displays a list of the submasters in your show Each page is displayed separately with up to 18 submasters on screen at any time The Submaster List includes the submaster number its bump but ton status its current level on stage its upfade downfade and dwell times its type its rate and its label Submasters with recorded levels pile on submasters are displayed in green inhibitive submasters in red and effect submasters in white Sub masters with no recorded levels are displayed in gray As you scroll through the submasters the currently selected submaster s attributes are highlighted in white and the currently selected field is highlighted in yel low Use S4 Previous Page and S5 Next Page to move through the list within each page of submasters Follow these steps to display Submaster List Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Sub S2 Displays Submaster List page 1 Sub List 2 Press Page 2 Enter Switch from Blind submaster page 1 to page 2 3 Press Page 1 Enter Switch from Blind submaster page 2 to page 1 chapter 11 submasters 135 Editing attributes in Submaster List The Submaster List allows you to edit any attributes shown on the list across a range of submasters simultaneously For example you can assign a five second wait time to
142. eads Group mode Select group number to use as group 3 Press Cue and enter the Prompt reads number of the cue you Group mode Select cue want to bring up number to use as group 4 Press At and enter the The cue s channels are brought level at which you wish to up on stage at the specified level bring the cue up Or press Prompt reads Full Group mode Press AT or use wheel to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit To use a submaster as a group follow the same procedure but press Sub instead of Cue in step 3 Note You may not group the channels in a cue part only in a whole cue Note You may not group the channels in an effect cue or effect submas ter 112 Express User Manual Using groups to modify cues or sub masters in Blind You can use groups to modify cues or submasters For example let s say you have created a group 3 that contains channels 1 through 10 at a level of 75 percent Follow these steps to add group 3 to submaster 2 Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Sub 2 3 Press Group 3 D Set channel levels Or press Enter to impose only the group s propor tions on the currently set levels Press Record Press Enter to re record the modified submaster Action Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Selects group 3 s channels Prompt reads Group mode To recall a grou
143. ects Blind display mode 2 Enter the cue number Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE 3 Press S1 Part then press Prompt reads or until the desired Select part number part is displayed 4 Press Channel and select Prompt reads the desired channels Select channel numbers 5 Set channel levels Use If the channels are new this adds At the trackpad Full or them to the part at the level indi Level or and Press cated If already in the part this At Clear to delete the modifies their level channels 6 Press Record Enter Records the modified part Note When you initially display a multipart cue any channel levels that are tracking from the previous cue are displayed in green new levels are displayed in blue When you press Part this changes Channels that make up the selected part are now displayed in blue channels that make up other parts of the multipart cue are displayed in green or gray in Blind 88 Express User Manual Modifying fade and wait times If you do not assign fade and wait times to a part Express automatically assigns it the default times See Setting default fade times on page 15 No wait time will be recorded Follow these steps to assign fade and wait times to parts in a multipart cue Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Enter the cue number Press S1 Part then press or until the part you want to edit is dis played
144. eed to restore them find the switches at location 4 and adjust the settings as listed below The Remote Video Interface checks DIP switch settings when unit is turned on You must restart the unit for the new settings to take effect DIP Switch Position Function 1 On Closed Normal operation Factory Use Only 2 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 3 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 4 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 5 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 6 On Closed Normal operation Factory Use Only 7 On Closed Normal operation Factory Use Only 8 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only Switches are either On Closed or Off Open 258 Express User Manual RVI ETCNet DIP switch settings In order to enable the Remote Video Interface RVI for use on the ETCNet network you must first adjust the settings of the two sets of ETCNet DIP switches You will need to use a pin or a similar fine pointed object to set the switches To set the switches follow these steps 1 Locate the two sets of DIP switches visible through the right side panel of the RVI 2 If the ETCNet cable is plugged into the BNC ThinNet connector set the back six DIP switches to Off up Set the front six to On down 3 If the ETCNet cable is plugged into the RJ45 Twisted Pair connector or the DB15 ThickNet connector set the front six switches to Off up Set the back six to On down
145. eh eaten St has 36 Channel Attributes display 0 0 0 0 ccc eee 37 Independent channels vu mica oa ae ee ew 38 Flipped Channels 39 Selecting channels e tiraria gue we OA Pe bk tates oe tke Gtk oe ew 40 Selecting channels in Flexichannel mode 41 Settina channellevelS cove io hee an 42 MA es e a He a re nds oa a 42 Pulls cp ee Moat OS Ee oie OE i gb hg BG Lt 42 Levels Ake ctf e es Aches a NAAA a 42 Has o A ns ins 42 SMC nea dc e td des eines aah ds era hale al 43 GRAMME CHECK l nit hed cil AA Log AENA i 44 ADQUEL de es da o E AN A DA 45 About Channels jc ore ton betes cu Side Gees aie ph plat Da 45 Chapter 6 II 47 CUTE in e or dc 48 COSSIO danos a O A id oe Natt 48 Alfade 2 3 04 24 Wa de as pis tarda EA Ana 48 SUBFOULAS snc ds a a eS 48 A A Ane Mer te ate a 48 Record TUNCHON Si pate Moe canna a eek Noa eae ea aches 49 CrEATING CUGS a4 a xe nth ta y AE oh Oe MOA hota Bild 50 VIEWING CUES e a ea aos hele e been bo ea ee oN ad 50 Working with cues in Stage mode 1 2 2 0 eee 51 Recording a cue in Stage eee 52 Working with cues in Blind mode 0 cee ee 53 Recording a cue in Blind 54 Recording a cue with a single fade tiM e o o 55 Recording a cue with split fade times o ooo o o 56 Recording a cue with a wait tiMe o o o oooooooooo 57 Recording cues with Link and FollowW 58 A A Seiad aed sas hen St ue Ot Mae 58
146. el is ina fader at 100 percent and you capture it and set it to 50 percent Express sets the captured channel at 50 percent Press Rel twice to release captured channels Channel Use Channel to select a channel or group of channels Use of this key is often optional Example Channel 1 Thru 9 Except 4 At 7 5 sets channels 1 through 3 and 5 through 9 to 75 percent Clear keypad Use Clear to clear the current keypad entry Press twice to clear all entries Example Channel 5 Clear 8 Enter selects channel 8 Clear fader Use the fader Clear to clear a fader pair of any cues which have been assigned to it Also use Clear to initiate the downfade of an effect cue Clear Loads Clear Loads is softkey S6 in the Load Management display Use S6 Clear Loads to disable dimmer monitoring for selected dimmer loads Copy Macro Copy Macro is softkey S7 in the Macro Editing display Press S7 Copy Macro to copy the contents of one macro to a second macro If the destination macro is already recorded the console will require a confirmation Example S1 Select Macro 5 S7 Copy Macro 9 Enter copies macro 5 to macro 9 appendix d reference 275 Crossfade Cue In a crossfade cue channel levels that increase fade to their new level in the assigned upfade time Channel levels that decrease fade to their new level in the assigned downfade time The cue starts when you press
147. el levels on a highest level basis Play Backup Play Backup is softkey S2 in the System Status display Use S2 Play Backup to play back a recording of a selected look on stage that is stored in a Sensor CEM Plus Press to increase the selected number by one Example Cue 6 Time 1 0 sets the fade time for cue 6 to 12 seconds Example Dim 1 At 7 5 patches dimmer 1 at 77 percent Positive Negative Positive Negative is softkey S1 in the Blind Effect Attribute display Press S1 Positive Negative to change the effect attribute from a pos itive chase steps are at their low value when off and their high level when on to a negative chase steps are at their high level when off and their low level when on All effects must have either the positive or negative attribute assigned all other attributes are optional Previous Page Previous Page is softkey S4 in many displays Press S4 Previous Page to go backward one display page Print Screen Print Screen is softkey S1 in the Load Management display Press S1 Print Screen to print a list of dimmer load errors Profile Profile is softkey S7 in the Patch display Press S7 Profile to assign one of 10 profiles to a dimmer A dimmer may be assigned a proportional patch level or a profile Example Dim 6 S7 Profile 4 Enter assigns profile 4 to dimmer 6 290 Express User Manual Purge Flexi Purge Flexi
148. el number s to flip and press S2 Flip Use Thru And and Except to select multiple channels 4 Press 1 then press Enter Selects channel Prompt reads Enable disable flipped channel s 1 Enable 0 Disable Channel is flipped 40 Express User Manual Selecting channels Using the keypad to set channel levels involves two steps selecting the channels whose levels you want to modify then entering output levels To select a single channel enter the channel number For example Channel 1 selects channel 1 Note When selecting channels you only need to press Channel if the Channel LED is not lit To select two channels that are not consecutively numbered enter the number of the first channel then press And and enter the number of the second channel For example Channel 1 And 7 selects channels 1 and 7 To select a group of consecutively numbered channels enter the number of the first channel then press Thru and enter the last num ber For example Channel 1 Thru 9 selects channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 To exclude channels from a selected group of consecutively num bered channels enter the first channel press Thru enter the last channel then press Except and enter the channels to leave out For example Channel 1 Thru 1 5 Except 5 Thru 1 3 selects channels 1 2 3 4 14 and 15 Use And Except and Thru to select multipl
149. elects Stage display mode 2 Set submaster 6 s slider Puts submaster 6 s current look to 10 t on stage 3 Select and set desired Selects channels and sets levels levels for channels to update in the submaster 4 Press S2 Update Sub Prompt reads To update sub master s select number s and press ENTER Press ONLY ENTER to update only those channels already in submaster s 5 To update only the chan Limits update nels already recorded in submaster 6 press S4 Only 6 Presssubmaster6 sbump Submaster 6 is updated button T Note If you do not set the slider to 10 Express will update the submas ter proportionally This means that the outputs on stage will match their current level only when the slider is at its current position For example if the slider is at 50 percent channel 7 is on stage at 25 per cent and you press Update channel 1 is set so that when the slider returns to 5 channel 1 returns to 25 percent This means that when the submaster is full channel 1 is at 50 percent The console will not allow you to update a channel in a submaster to a level higher than the level to which the submaster slider is set 130 Express User Manual Live control of a submaster s rate In Stage mode selecting a submaster and pressing S3 Rate allows the timing of the submaster to be controlled by the rate wheel or keyboard entry Follow these steps to change the rate of an active submaster in Stage
150. els are displayed in magenta chapter 5 setting channel levels 37 Channel Attributes display The Channel Attributes display allows you to assign attributes to specific channels including e Independent Allows a channel to be unaffected by Grandmaster Flash Release Solo and Blackout Release requires an extra keypress e Flip Allows a channel s output to be reversed A flipped channel outputs at full when set to zero and at zero when set to full e Label Express does not allow you to assign labels to channels However you may assign labels to channels by editing the show using Expres sion Off Line ETC s free show editing program for Windows Chon Ind obe han Ind Flip Label y SR P J y y y y Stadium Wash To go to the Channel Attributes display follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setupl Selects Setup menu 2 Press 1111 Enter Selects Channel Attribute display Independent channels Express User Manual An independent channel is not affected by the Grandmaster Blackout Solo or Flash Otherwise independent channels function normally Use S1 Independent to make a channel independent Press Rel three times to release all independent channels Channels that control movement of moving lights or color scrollers will often be set as Independent This assures that in the case of a blackout or change in the Grandmaster setting the position of the moving light or color scroller will not
151. ensitivity for faster adjustments chapter 1 introduction 3 Troubleshooting If you have problems with your console please refer to the manual or the console s Help function for instructions For more information about using Help see page 4 If you do not find the answer in the manual call your local dealer or ETC Technical Services Please have the following information available before you Call e Console model and serial number located on back panel e Software version displayed on Setup menu e Options installed e Dimmer installation type e Dimmer manufacturer Address all correspondence about Express to Electronic Theatre Controls Inc Customer Service Department 3030 Laura Lane Middleton WI 53562 To reach the ETC Technical Services department call the number shown below After hours and weekend calls are answered electronically and for warded to a service representative ETC Technical Services US 800 775 4382 Monday through Friday 9 00 AM to 5 00 PM CST Europe 44 181 896 1000 Asia 852 2799 9325 Express User Manual Using this manual This manual provides instructions for using Express s features and optional accessories Setting up Express If you are setting up the system for the first time chapters 4 and 5 and appendix A instruct you in installing and configuring Express If the system is already in place you may not need to refer to these chapters New users If you are
152. entering the step number Use And and Thru to select multi ple steps Selected steps are displayed in white on the monitor Note If you select a range of steps only cue steps will be selected Style steps may only be edited individually and will be left out of selected ranges Once the step is selected choose the attribute you wish to edit by press ing one of the following softkeys The selected attribute is displayed in yellow on the monitor S2 StyleAllows you to select a style from the style menu S3 Select Cue Allows you to enter a cue number for the selected step S4 Type LevelAllows you to select a crossfade or an allfade and to set intensity level S8 Up Down Follow Allows you to set upfade and downfade times and to set follow time Once you finish editing the subroutine press Record Enter to save your changes Note You may use the arrow keys to move from one field or line to the next For example press J to select the next step or press gt to enter information one field to the right of the current field Deleting a step Press S6 Delete Step and enter the step number Then press Enter Express deletes the selected step and renumbers the remaining steps Inserting a step Press S1 Step and enter the step number where you want to insert the new step Then press Enter Express inserts a blank step before the selected step 158 Express User Manual chapter 14 Macros A
153. er to Program insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 4 Enter Selects program 4 to insert before Prompt reads Select number of programs to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press 2 Enter Inserts two new programs before program 4 All following programs are renumbered chapter 20 control interfaces 225 Copying real time programs Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 2 Enter 3 Press S7 More Softkeys S2 Copy Program 4 Press 1 Thru 5 Enter 5 Press 7 0110 Enter Action Selects Setup display mode Selects Real Time Programs display Prompt reads Select program number s to copy then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects programs 1 through 5 to copy Prompt reads To copy selected programs s select time and press ENTER Press to enter AM or PM Copies program 1 to a new pro gram starting at 7 00 AM the rest of the programs maintain their original relationship in time Moving real time programs You may move one or more real time programs from one time slot to another To move a single program you may also use the arrow keys to highlight the time for the program you want to move use the keypad to enter the new time then press Enter Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 2 Enter 3 Press S7 More Softkeys S3 Move Program 4 Press 1 Thru 5 Enter 5 Press 5 0 0 En
154. er to another follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Sub Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE 3 Enter the number of the Corner reads submaster you wish to Sub 1 copy 4 Press Record Sub Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Enter the number of the Corner reads new submaster Sub 9 6 Press Enter Submaster Contents of submaster 1 are copy is complete copied to submaster 9 Note You may also copy a look from a submaster to a cue or a group To do so press Cue or Group in place of Sub in step 4 132 Express User Manual Loading cues or groups to submasters Load Sub allows you to load the contents of one or more recorded groups or cues into submasters To load a look from a range of cues or groups to submasters follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Load Sub Prompt reads Select submaster s to load To cancel press CLEAR 2 Press 9 Thru 1 2 Selects submasters 9 through 12 Corner reads Sub 12 3 Press Cue or Group Prompt reads Select cue s to load into submaster s To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 1 And 3 Thru Selects cues 1 3 4 and 5 5 to copy to submasters 9 through 12 Corner reads Cue 5 5 Press Enter Submaster Contents of cues 1 3 4 and 5 copy is complete are copied to submasters 9 10
155. es 276 Delete DIOP da alto a E Aia de Aa 277 Delete SUD 264 a o a as odin dada EAs 277 BINNER ir o 277 DIMMEFStatust old ica Mere eee ee 277 Disable ETC LK cana aver hae tA A AAP Ee cee eS 277 Disable MID st sec atin ela dat od tees ai 277 DMX51 2 MOd6 vis cars scr ai Ese a anes ba om a Se Bae 278 DMX512 Polta lc aa YA ae tes eG tnd a 278 DMX57 2 5 PERA fai lactate odes O ee ea Ae 278 DMX512 Start i ee atta edo a ae eden dee tae a eto von 278 DOWNYAMOW nia ay By eae oasis le es Rives ib 278 Dela aaa wide Stat decane 278 EMO veras cre Ut ale eee ht GeO hohe eee RD 279 ETC CUE Tanar Ea sles Sate ae wn Gi om a Reem Baw 279 Effect SUBMASTED ecards aisha ee te ee es aed edo ae 279 Enable ETC sx Aeterna od 279 A A hte aA a een 279 Enter Macrae cara een betas en Mies Does Fae oe 279 EXCEPT xii ton tse Hk ein Rhee oe Pe ore ee es 280 Faderstatus iS Pla ooo asas wees 280 Fashion taa dug TAIE ho 280 Flexiones an ues helene daw 280 FIND tia a dee nn o TE EEA nes 281 FIIPPEd ChannelS s cseces ee SE See Re de ON a 281 EONO Wasis 3a tie cath ceded A Sateen EA ed 281 Full i hee Soe he ee ae een ees oon ke es Dd 281 GO R deen Glee eta een Saeed Ge Ee eee ee 281 GOUPS3 eae adc bars Adan aa Soe nea eee SAA 282 GIOUDE irda ascents als ci eds 282 Group Editing Modes esseer ier uera ep e aa eaae Ea 282 Gup modes sachs oae ask BR AEE A dd EE 282 O S T E A Sea E E eee aaah 282 Helpa seai at ie a nai gaa da tna S s Ala in AA a ma eana 282 HO dm
156. es 293 SElIECURACK 4 nawenc Lite hen p kak Ata a Mudd tert ke 293 Selected channels ss ciao shee Ls wales ok entr Red 293 Seti ClOCK io rt Auta LA a aa 6 ee 293 SEDIMENTO ey hee hee Bats 293 O A Ais i it abs a Atk thet 294 Show Hide Labels ie centuur eaa a EE 294 A ee ee a a a Pa Ay hae ete es 294 SOlOse A a EM aa nae 294 DOME te bid abd uate Lite Maa RG eS ah id e eS Be 295 SLAG an Maa ck Rese ag ees ra tea VS 295 Step Effect Subroutine 2 2 ee 295 STEPS Metu aria a VEL AR RR oe PD 295 Steps SUBO UEM ss esa hs pa les eis oh ee katt FA 295 Step TIME J o0 2 eae G AG er oe eee bee ean a oe ee 295 StOP PEN sy sate ess o Pua oe ee Qe Ee Bete ae 296 A E Maines ney eee ee A Ae we eae as 296 Style steps subroutine naasna aaa aana aeaee 296 SUD i cc uen A a a a Geta ana Bale 296 SUD Es 0h aia anan e AAE ae e aana vo Sni 296 SUBIMASIOR acta ta E E ET A Ne we ant 296 Submaster bump buttons 0 0 20 arana 297 SU FOU Sse ese rt rs a Some aya tee 297 Suppress Labels iaa rail bee Aa awe aA 297 System SlatUSs 240 6 oor dankd he one eee aes RS 297 TARE ete acetone whine Ae la a Ga oa eee Badd 297 TNES ase Jak et ak a AN Seas inte et Gare ae 297 WAG Kaos ated acer O etek hee eon aa ahd 298 Tracked Channels scr siccs aid stim paid edad e ig 298 TYDO s feet Goan ah ate Cea a bees dae AE ten Pete Ae a 298 TYPC MOVEL rer Reet waned Raat Pe Mee ee ae 298 Upata on PA ee eee eee 298 Unset DIMME arska dra eh ed aoe eh BG 298
157. es all recorded cues from a show To erase all cues follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 4 Clear Func tions Enter Press 2 Clear Cues Enter Press Enter Action Displays Setup menu Displays Clear Functions menu Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER Prompt reads To clear cues press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Cues cleared Returns to Setup menu 188 Express User Manual Groups Clear Groups erases all recorded groups from a show To erase all groups follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 3 Clear Groups Prompt reads Enter To clear groups press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Groups cleared Returns to Setup menu Submasters Clear Submasters erases all recorded submasters from a show To erase all submasters follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 4 Clear Submas Prompt reads ters To clear submasters select page and press ENTER 0 All pages 4 Press Enter Submasters cleared Returns to Setup menu chapter 17 clear functions 189 Show and Pat
158. es macro entries and Insert Mode inserts new entries before the currently selected entry displayed in yellow Insert Step Insert Step is softkey S5 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Effect and Blind Subroutine displays Press S5 Insert Step to insert an empty step ahead of the selected or specified step Example S5 Insert Step Enter Enter places an empty step in front of the selected step Example S5 Insert Step 5 Enter Enter places an empty step in front of step 5 Jump to cue subroutine A subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Jump to cue step It then automatically starts another cue which is not included in the subrou tine You can jump to any type of cue regular subroutine or effect When you create the Jump to cue step enter the number of the cue to which to jump Keypad Numbers Use the keypad number keys to enter all numeric information dimmers channels cues times intensities etc Last Page Last Page is softkey S4 in many displays Press S4 Last Page to go backward one display page After software version 1 8 this key is renamed Previous Page Learn Macro Express s Learn function allows you to create a macro by performing an actual sequence of keystrokes Express records the keystrokes you exe cute in a macro The recorded keystroke sequence can then be rerun by pressing the appropriate macro key Once you record a macro in Learn mode you can edit
159. es of submaster memory Two timed manual fader pairs Fader functions Fade times programmable from 1 second to 99 59 minutes Manual override of upfade and or downfade Rate override Split time fades Manual fades User selectable default fade times Hold Back functions Playback controls Two timed manual fader pairs Two Go buttons Two Hold buttons Two Back buttons Two Rate buttons Two Clear buttons 24 submasters Programmable Master on 100mm potentiometer Blackout function Trackpad Eight softkeys to streamline operations 268 Express User Manual Display functions VGA video output Extensive online Help displays available for all functions Stage Blind Patch Setup Flexichannel displays only recorded channels Submaster functions Ten pages of 24 recorded submasters Fully overlapping channel assignments Proportional channel levels Bump buttons on all 24 submasters may be placed in enabled dis abled or solo mode as a group or individually Integral LEDs on all 24 submasters Programmable fade and wait times Live and programmed rate control submasters programmable for overlapping pile on or inhibitive opera tion All submasters programmable with effects Update function Control keypad features Channel functions Group function to allow channels to be manipulated as proportionally balanced groups Proportional adjustment with level wheel And Except Only and Thru functi
160. etc To cancel the Bounce attribute press S4 again Bounce subroutine The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Bounce step It then runs back through the steps in reverse order and repeats the sequence for the number of times you specify When you create the Bounce step enter the number of times you want the subroutine to bounce One bounce equals running through the sequence forward once and reverse once Enter 0 for a continuous bounce Build Build is softkey S5 in the attribute list of the Effect display Use S5 Build to cause each step in an effect to remain active until the entire step list is executed When the step list begins again all steps go out and the cycle begins again To cancel the Build attribute press S5 again Bump Status Bump Status is softkey S1 in the Blind Submaster displays Use S1 Bump Status to change the function of the submaster bump button Choices are enabled disabled or solo Example S1 Bump Status 2 Enter disables the bump button of the selected submaster 274 Express User Manual Cancel Cancel is softkey S7 in the Load Management display Use S7 Cancel to interrupt a Record Loads operation that has already started Captured channels Captured channels are channels that you have selected and are live on stage They remain live until you press Rel to release them Captured channels override all other channel settings For example if a chann
161. ete Part 7 Only 8 Follow Blind Group 1 Select Group 2 Group List gt Group List 3 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Group 7 Only 8 a Blind Submaster 1 Bump Status 2 Sub List Sub List 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Sub 7 Only 8 2 Stage 2 1 Enable Disable Quickstep 2 Part 3 Sub List 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete 7 More Softkeys gt Stage 8 Solo Cue List 1 Part 2 Follow 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Cue Fi 8 Return gt Blind Cue Group List gt 3 E 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Group 7 8 Return gt Group Sub List 1 Bump Status 2 Hold 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Sub 7 8 Return gt Submaster 302 Blind Cue Effect 1 Follow 2 Cue List gt Cue List 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Cue 7 More Softkeys gt Effect 2 8 a Blind Sub Effect 1 Bump Status 2 Sub List gt Sub List 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Sub 7 More Softkeys Effect 2 8 Blind Subroutine 1 Step 2 Cue List gt Cue List 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Cue 7 More Softkeys gt Subr2 8 z Patch 1 Multiplex 2 A 3 B 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Unpatch 7 Profile 8 Show Hide Labels I O Configu
162. eys gt RTC 2 8 Return gt Setup Options 1 Disable MIDI 8 Return gt Setup Macro Editing 2 1 On Sub Bump 2 Off Sub Bump 3 On Trigger 4 Off Trigger 5 Copy Macro 6 re 7 More Softkeys gt Macro 8 Macro Wait System Status 1 Multiplex 2 Play Backup 3 Record Backup 4 5 Dimmer Status 6 Rack Status Jos 8 Return gt ETCLink Load Management 1 Print Screen 2 de 3 4 Load Check 5 Record Loads 6 Clear Loads 7 Cancel 8 Return gt ETCLink Link List 1 Link 2 X Channel 3 Y Channel 4 Position 5 Insert Link 6 Delete Link 7 Move Link 8 Return gt Attributes Real Time Clock 2 1 Insert Program 2 Copy Program 3 Move Program 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 A 7 More Softkeys gt RTC 8 Sort 303 Rack Status 1 a 2 BS 3 Fa 4 System Status 5 Dimmer Status 6 Select Rack 7 a 8 Return gt ETCLink 304 Express User Manual index A A 33 272 About 31 About Dimmer w ETCLink 32 Channel 45 Dimmer 31 Show 5 Accessories 193 ETCLink 197 Remote Focus Unit 194 Add channel 87 Allfade 48 272 275 Subroutine step 152 Alternate 272 And 272 Arrow keys 8 Asterisk 11 12 At 272 Attribute 272 Attributes Channel Attributes display 37 Automated lighting devices 229 B B 33 272 Back 94 273 Back panel 244 Backup looks 205 Playing 210 Recording 209 Blackout 273 Blackout cue 80
163. eystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Settings Selects System Settings menu and press Enter 3 Select 3 Default Fade Prompt reads Time and press Enter Enter default up fadetime 4 Press 6 to enterasixsecond Corner reads upfade time UpTime 6 5 Press Enter Prompt reads Enter default down fadetime 6 Press 3 to enter a three Corner reads second downfade time DnTime 3 7 Press Enter Fade times are reset Note If the upfade and downfade times are the same both will change when you change the upfade time Setting default Level Express allows you to assign a value to the Level key The default value is 100 percent You may assign Level any value between zero and 100 Follow these steps to assign a value to Level Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Set Selects System Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Select 4 Default Level Prompt reads and press Enter Enter default level Press FULL button for 100 4 Use the keypad to enter New default for Level is set the two digit value 00 99 you wish to assign to Level or press Full Note To enter a level between one and nine percent you must press zero then the number For example to set the default level to five percent press OJ 5 in step 4 Setting default fader clear time Pressing the Clear key above one of the fader pai
164. f five seconds After you start cue 7 the next cue in the Cue List plays automatically five seconds later 60 Express User Manual Combining Link and Follow to create playback loops Express allows you to use Link and Follow to create cue playback sequences in which a group of cues plays back automatically and repeats Follow these steps to create a five cue sequence Keystrokes 1 Create five cues numbered 1 2 3 4 and 5 Press Cue then press 1 the number of the first cue you want to include in the playback loop Press S5 Follow 5 Enter Repeat steps 2 and 3 for cues 2 through 5 Press Cue then press 5 the number of the last cue in the playback loop Press Link then press 1 the number of the first cue in the playback loop Press Enter Action Cue list displays cues 1 through 5 Selects the first cue Assigns a follow time of five sec onds to the first cue Assigns a follow time of five sec onds to the remaining cues Selects the last cue in the play back loop Creates a loop by linking the last cue to the first cue Note You may also use effects to create loops See Chapter 12 Effects for more information chapter 6 cues 61 Using Link to link a macro to a cue Link allows you to automatically run a macro when a cue runs If you want the macro to delay before running start the macro with a Macro Wait of the desired length See Chapter 15 Working wi
165. first step and repeats the sequence for the number of times you specify When you create the Loop step enter the number of times you want the loop to return to the top of the step list If you enter 5 the sequence will play six times Enter 0 to create a continuous loop M1 M3 Use macro keys M1 M3 to immediately execute the associated macro instructions 286 Express User Manual M Analogous in function to macro keys M1 M3 used for macros 1 3 M is used for macros 4 and higher Press M then enter macro number and press Enter Macro A macro allows you to store a series of keystrokes and later replay it with one or two keystrokes Macros simplify complex tasks that you perform often You can program up to 2 000 macros in Express depending on how large they are Macro Wait Macro Wait is softkey S8 after S7 More Softkeys in the Macro Editing display Use Macro Wait to place a pause in the macro execution The Macro Wait instruction may be placed in the macro as many times as required Manual If a submaster has a manual dwell its upfade starts when you press and hold the bump button It runs until channels reach full recorded levels then holds at full as long as you hold the bump button the downfade begins when you release it Therefore if you don t hold the bump button for the duration of the upfade time channels do not reach their full recorded levels Note If you do not enter a dwell time
166. group or another submaster This example illustrates how you record a submaster without including levels contributed by the specified submaster Keystrokes 1 2 Press Stage Select desired channels and set channel levels Press Record Sub Press 5 Press Except Sub 8 Press Enter Action Selects Stage display mode Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects submaster 5 to be recorded Instructs that levels raised by submaster 3 be ignored Prompt reads Select excepted submaster number Records submaster 5 minus submaster 3 s levels Note Press Cue or Group in place of Sub in step 5 to leave out the channels supplied by a cue or group Note Except will not work with effect cues or effect submasters chapter 11 submasters 127 Creating inhibitive submasters Inhibitive submasters allow you to limit the output of a group of channels Channel outputs are limited to the level at which you set the slider An inhibitive submaster set at 10 100 percent does not affect channel out put An inhibitive submaster controls the levels of its assigned channels in the same way the Grandmaster controls the levels of all channels Note If channels that you expect to see on stage are missing or at the wrong levels check to see if a submaster is inhibiting them If a channel is fully inhibited by a submaster its level will be dis
167. group or submaster you specify When you use Record to record a cue levels are recorded in only one cue Track is a record function that works only with cues It allows you to build anew cue from the previous cue s channel settings Tracked channels are channels whose levels do not change from one cue to the next A track often runs through several cues for the length of a scene or an act Track also allows you to add tracked channels through existing cues For example if you have created all cues for a scene and then decide to add a few new channels to all cues or adjust the level of a channel throughout the cues Track lets you do so with one short record command To do the same thing with Record would require you to add the new channels to each cue individually Note When a channel level that tracks through a series of cues reaches an Allfade cue the track ends We use the standard Record function for all cues in this chapter Instruc tions for using the Track function are included in Chapter 7 Track Express User Manual Creating cues Express allows you to save up to 600 cues per show A cue is a look you have created and recorded and can replay in a timed fader pair If your show requires more than 600 cues you can read a second show from dis kette during a break or between cues See Chapter 17 Diskette func tions for more information about recording shows on diskette This chapter includes instructions and examples fo
168. h Link LiSt o o oo o o 237 hsertinora lINKus2cd wnt init a wikia pad stud ne habia 238 MOVING GIN Kine ae enr is Dae dete Baad Go 239 Merging WOJNOKS acne tack ee ne ON eRe Ee bee ae 240 D leting a links sc wea an 4a E DAAE EE PA eee eS 241 Appendix A TS TAN ATION 00D DR OM A tee an del ESOT dd 243 Express back panelicsccntce ai bd aoe bene Pedra wee ag 244 Installing console and monitor 0 0 0 0 245 Connecting GIMMENS aee doe dhe a Se kde a eden 246 Replacing the auxiliary fuse nnna eee 246 SYSTEM COMMQUIATION renes s n Corer Er a wk we eae ed we 247 Setting DMX512 starting numbers 000 247 Setting Multiplex mode 0 2 0 0 0 0 eee 248 Setting DMX512 speed nananana eee 248 Updating Express software 0 0 0000 249 Installing a printer s on aaan ee 250 Installing Remote Focus Unit 0 0 0 ee eee 251 Installing MIDE siaa td Nol ete dlrs ANS edo ad 252 EEN Ea A A A Lae eke 253 Installing Remote Interfaces 2 0 0 0 000000 eee 254 Installing Remote Video Interface o o o ooooooo o 256 Installing remote unit software 2 0 0 0 anaa rereana aaa 259 Installing remote video monitors 0 000 eee eee 260 Installing remote Macros nnaou aaua aaeeea 261 8 Express User Manual Appendix B Error INCSSAGES 0 ii AA FEB ROR BEET ee A 263 Diskette error MESSAGES 1 es 263 Othercerror MESSAGES oi Oe oe Soa be he eee 263 ET CMR SOnS asco 5 lt a taces tech
169. hannel levels You assign output levels to channels using the basic format Channel At where the first number is the channel and the second is the level For example Channel 4 At 7 5 sets channel 4 at 75 percent If you enter a single digit for the level Express multiplies it by ten and you must follow it with Enter In other words Channel 4 At 1 Enter sets channel 4 to 10 percent To set channel 4 to 1 percent enter Channel 4 At 0111 You can also use the level wheel Full Level or S8 Flash to set channel levels Trackpad Full To set channel levels with the trackpad select the channels whose levels you want to modify then move your finger up or down on the trackpad to set the desired output level You can also use the trackpad to adjust output levels for all active channels To set selected channel levels enter Channel 1 Thru 5 then move your finger on the trackpad to set levels To modify all channels currently at a level above zero press Enter then move your finger on the trackpad to set levels Full sets selected channel levels to 100 percent For example press Channel 1 Thru 5 Full to set channels 1 2 3 4 and 5 to 100 percent Level Level sets selected channel levels to the output level assigned to the Level key The default value for Level is 100 percent See Chapter 3 Entering system settings page 16 for instructions on changing defaul
170. he keypad to enter Prompt reads the desired dimmer num Select dimmer numbers then ber s Use And and Thru press ENTER to assign to a if you want to select more channel or press AT to assign than one dimmer a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile 4 Press S1 Multiplex Selected dimmers are identified as Multiplexed Note Use S2 A and S3 B along with the numeric keypad to enter dimmer numbers as you create your patch If you select a multiplexed dimmer without specifying A or B the system defaults to A Patching to a Strand CD80 dimmer rack Strand CD80 dimmer racks have 48 dimmer slots Each dimmer slot holds either two 2 4kW dimmers or one 6kW or 12kW dimmer The console requires that you include all 96 possible dimmer numbers per rack in the patch Refer to the charts below to determine dimmer numbers for each slot on each rack When patching 6kW or 12kW dimmers enter the slot s odd dimmer number under the desired channel number Enter the slot s even dimmer number under channel zero For example to patch a 6kW dimmer into the last dimmer slot on the first rack enter dimmer 95 in the desired channel number and dimmer 96 in channel zero 1 3 E T 11 g7 199 103 106 107 2 4 6 a 1z 36 1100 104 11 068 708 TS 15 iF 1S 21 23 1081 111 1 13 1 15 117 14 16 18 20 22 24 110 112 1114 116 118 2 27 29 31 33 25 26 26 30 jaz 34 55 37 aa A 4a 45 147 36 40
171. his please contact your dealer or ETC Once the console is on the MIDI Channel must be set Select 1 ETC MIDI Channel in the Options Settings menu The console operates at all times in MIDI Mode 3 or Omni off Poly This means It only receives or transmits MIDI commands on the user selected channel The Select MIDI Channel function allows the user to specify the desired channel Express ignores all MIDI commands on channels other than the specified one so be sure your MIDI gear is set to the same chan nel The console remembers the selected MIDI channel the next time it is turned on Follow these steps to configure Express for MIDI use 1 Turn console on 2 Press Setup to display Setup menu Then select 6 Options Set tings and press Enter to display the Options Settings menu The fol lowing display appears Opt ic 11 ETC MIDI Channel MIDI Show Control Device IDs ETCL ink Disabled ETCLink Address 1 Powerup Macro 100 Real Time Programs Enab led Twisted Pair Polarity Not Swopped 3 Select 1 ETC MIDI channel and press Enter 4 Enter the MIDI channel you will use 1 16 and press Enter Verify that your MIDI equipment is also set to the same channel Express will ignore MIDI commands on other channels Press S1 Disable MIDI to disable ETC MIDI mode 216 Express User Manual ETC MIDI message formats The following table lists MIDI message formats used to control Express All numbers are in He
172. ic keypad to set levels for selected channels 8 Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 9 Press 7 Corner reads Cue 7 10 Press Enter Records cue 7 with channels 60 through 70 11 Press S8 Solo Restores channels other than 60 through 70 to previous levels Warning If you press Solo in Stage mode unselected channels control ling lights on stage will go to zero chapter 6 cues 63 Modifying a recorded cue live All the preceding examples have involved creating a new cue In Stage if you want to add remove or modify channel levels you must play back the cue make your changes then re record the cue If you are changing cue attributes you do not need to play back the cue Modifying channels in a cue If you are not familiar with procedures for playing back cues see Chapter 9 Playing back cues Follow these steps to modify cues in Stage mode Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Cuel enter cue Plays back selected cue number and press Go 3 Select channels and set Modifies cue channel levels channel levels to make the desired changes to the cue 4 Press Record Enter Re records cue with desired modifications Or Or Press Record 8 Enter Records the modified cue as cue 8 Note If you re record as the same cue modifications affect the look on stage If you record the cue with a new numbe
173. ile upgrading please call ETC s Technical Services department at 800 775 4382 250 Installing a printer Express User Manual Express supports parallel printers including most laser printers Printer functions are described in Chapter 17 Printing Follow these steps to install printer 1 Insert parallel printer cable into connector labeled Parallel Printer on the back panel of the console 2 Insert opposite end of printer cable into printer 3 Turn printer power switch on and verify that printer is on line Console connector DB25F Pinout 1 OONDORWNDY 10 11 12 13 14 to 17 18 to 25 Signal STRB DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 ACK Busy Not used not connected Ground Printer connector Centronics D36 Pinout 1 OONODORWNDY 10 11 12 18 13 to 15 17 19 to 36 16 appendix a installation 251 Installing Remote Focus Unit The Remote Focus Unit RFU allows you to set channel levels check dim mers or run cues from remote locations To install the RFU follow these steps 1 Verify that RFU power switch is turned Off Unit is off when switch is in the position toward the bottom edge of the RFU 2 Insert the RFU cable into the connector on the back of the console or Remote Interface labeled RFU 3 Turn RFU power switch to On RFU console connector XLR 6 pin female RFU pinout 1 Data to RFU 2 Data 3 Data from RFU 4 Data 5 Common AC ground
174. ime of four seconds to step 1 Step 2 will start five seconds after step 1 starts Update Update is softkey S2 in the Stage displays Press S2 Update to re record active submasters cues and groups as a selective record Modified levels are recorded into the source and control is simultaneously returned Example S2 Update Sub 1 Enter records Sub 1 with any modified channels originally controlled by Sub 1 Channel control is restored to Sub dl Wait Use Wait to hold the start of the upfade or downfade to accomplish lag lead type cues The first wait will hold the upfade the second will hold the downfade The wait time 0 to 99 59 will begin counting when the cue is activated Example Cue 5 Time 6 Wait 6 Enter sets cue 5 to wait six sec onds before starting a six second upfade Example Cue 7 Wait Wait 5 Enter sets cue 7 to wait five seconds before starting the downfade 300 Express User Manual Appendix softKkeys The following charts show all available softkeys on Express consoles using software version 2 0 Stage 1 Sneak 2 Update 3 Rate 4 Only 5 Follow 6 Load Sub 7 More Softkeys gt Stage 2 8 Flash Blind Cue 1 Part 2 Cue List Cue List 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Delete Cue 7 Only 8 Follow Blind Multipart 1 Part 2 Cue List Cue List 3 Rate 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 Del
175. ing numbers may not be changed Down Arrow Use J to move through various displays such as the Effect and Macro Editing display modes or the Stage and Blind displays Dwell Dwell is softkey S1 in the Cue List display Use S1 Dwell to access the dwell time field for cue effects appendix d reference 279 Effect Express allows you to create up to 600 effects each with up to 100 steps Effects allow you to assign channels to a series of steps When you play back the effect the steps run in assigned chase patterns or in random order You may record them as cues or submasters Each effect includes level and timing controls for the steps in the effect and overall timing con trols for the effect itself Each effect can run for up to 99 59 minutes Note Current channel levels are not affected by an effect until a step runs that specifically addresses the channel Effect cue An effect cue contains an effect Effects allow you to assign channels to aseries of steps When you play back the effect the steps run in assigned chase patterns or in random order Effect submaster An effect submaster contains an effect Effects allow you to assign chan nels to a series of steps When you play back the effect the steps run in assigned chase patterns or in random order Play the effect by pressing the submaster bump button or by raising the submaster slider Enable ETCLink Enable ETCLink is softkey S1 in the ETCLink Func
176. ished levels take precedence If a submaster slider contains a recorded pile on submaster the LED lights Note Channel levels set on the keypad and inhibitive submasters both override pile on submaster levels Inhibitive submaster An inhibitive submaster holds the output of channels below a specified level An inhibitive submaster doesn t actually set channel levels it just prevents them from exceeding a specified level If a submaster slider con tains a recorded inhibitive submaster the LED lights Effect submaster An effect submaster has an effect recorded in it Press an effect submas ter s bump button or move its slider to start the effect running See Chap ter 12 Working with effects for more information on effect submasters Any submaster may be programmed with an effect If a submaster slider contains a recorded effect submaster the LED lights chapter 11 submasters 117 Changing type You can change a submaster s type by using the Type key When you change a submaster type levels recorded in the submaster are retained This means that you can change a submaster from pile on to inhibitive and back without losing any level or timing information If you change the type to effect channel and level information is erased To change a submaster s type follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display 2 Press Sub Prompt reads Select submaster number 3 Press Typel Prom
177. isplay modes other than the Macro Editing display you must use Learn to create it chapter 14 macros Using Macro display mode Macro display mode allows you to create or edit macros without affecting channel levels Softkeys Enter Macro and gt may not be entered in a macro in Macro display mode 161 Caution Express does not check the sequence of keystrokes to confirm that it will work It is possible to create macros that don t work When you run the macro you will receive whatever error messages are appropriate To avoid problems you should plan your macro before you start recording it by determining exactly what keystrokes you want to include You might want to do this by running through the task and writing down each key stroke Follow these steps to create a macro to record a show to diskette auto matically Keystrokes ily 2 Press Setup Select 8 Macro Editing and press Enter Press 8 Enter Press Setup 3 Enter Press 1 Enter Press Enter Press Enter Macro Action Selects Setup display screen Selects Macro display screen Prompt reads Select macro number then press ENTER Blank macro created Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels and slid ers are not valid entries in macros Enters setup display Macro contents line reads SETUP 3 ENTER Selects Write Show To Disk Macro contents line read
178. ive of the channels in the original cue Press Stage to return and continue Follow these steps to convert a standard cue to a multipart cue Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage or Blind Selects display mode 2 Press Cue 1 Selects cue 1 3 Press Channel 1 Thru Creates part 1 Places channels 1 5 Record S7 More through 5 in part 1 Remaining Softkeys S2 Part 1 channels are placed in part 8 Enter 4 Press Channel 6 Thru Creates part 2 Moves channels 6 1110 Record S2 Part through 10 from part 8 to part 2 2 Enter 5 Press Channel 1 1 Creates part 3 Moves channels Thru 1 5 Record S2 11 through 15 from part 8 to part Part 3 Enter 3 Part 8 contains channels 16 through 20 Note When a normal cue is split into a multipart cue all of the channels assigned to that cue are placed in part 8 initially From part 8 they are moved to any one of the other seven parts When all of the channels are assigned to a part part 8 is deleted automatically 86 Express User Manual Wait times in multipart cues You can set individual wait times of up to 99 59 minutes for each part of a multipart cue The wait time is the delay between when you press Go and when the part begins If no wait is recorded all parts run simulta neously when you press Go Follow these steps to assign a wait time to a part Keystrokes Action 1 Press Cue then enter the Selects cue number
179. ixture type then press ENTER 1 XY position 0 other The link sets the trackpad to double mode Link entry is com plete chapter 21 moving lights Using a link 233 Once you have linked the color control channels for the two color scrol lers Express allows you to control them on the trackpad To control the scrollers follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press 1 3 Place your finger to the trackpad Move your fin ger Action Selects Stage display Selects channel 1 Channel number is gold signifying that it is assigned to the X list Through the link selects channel 11 Channel number is yellow signi fying that it is assigned to the Y list As you move your finger up and down on the left half of the track pad channel 1 s level rises and falls As you move your finger up and down on the right half of the trackpad channel 11 s level rises and falls 234 Express User Manual Linking two moving lights Use Link List to link the pan and tilt channels on two moving lights This link will control the pan for both lights on the X list and the tilt for both lights on the Y list As you move your finger on the trackpad both lights movement will be synchronized Channels 2 and 3 control pan and tilt for the first light and channels 12 and 13 control pan and tilt for the second light To link the channels follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 1 1 Enter
180. kes In addition you can link macros Using Learn Express s Learn function allows you to create a macro by performing an actual sequence of keystrokes Express records the keystrokes as you make them The recorded keystroke sequence can then be rerun by pressing the appropriate macro key Once you record a macro in Learn mode you can edit the sequence in Macro mode to adjust its operation Learn works in any display mode except the Macro Editing display To create a sample macro using Learn follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Live display mode 2 Press Learn Prompt reads Select macro number to learn then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 7 Enter Learning Macro 7 flashes in red in the upper left corner of the monitor Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels trackpad and sliders are not valid entries in macros 4 Enter Channel 1 Thru Sets channels 1 through 5 at 50 5 At 5 Enter percent 5 Enter Channel 1 Thru Sets channels 1 through 10 at 1110 Full Full 6 Enter Channel 1 Thru Sets channels 1 through 10 at 1110 At 0 Enter zero 7 Press Enter Macro Concludes macro recording 8 Press M 7 Enter Macro 7 runs Channels 1 through 5 rise to 50 percent then chan nels 1 through 10 rise to Full then the levels drop to zero Note If your macro needs to contain softkeys from d
181. l a new level instruction is encountered It also allows you to modify groups of cues quickly and add channels to cues You can also use it to create a new cue from the previous one by pulling all levels forward into the Blind display of the new cue Express User Manual Track record When you record a series of cues you typically record the first cue then build the second cue from the first Some of the channels change but many remain the same The third cue is built from the second and so on This procedure results in many channels being set to a level in one cue and staying at that level for several cues A channel whose level does not change through a series of consecutive cues is said to track from cue to cue That same sequence of unchanged levels is also referred to as a track The Track key creates tracks by pulling channel levels from the previous cue in Blind mode or by adding tracks to existing cues in either Blind or Stage or Tracksheet Rising channel levels are displayed in blue in the Blind display Falling channel levels are displayed in green Channel levels displayed in magenta indicate that the channel is tracking i e that its level is the same as in the previous cue The following examples demonstrate how Track works They include five cues each with five channels In these examples when a channel changes level from one cue to the next it is printed in bold tracked chan nels are printed no
182. l device that is providing the channel s level Possible sources include Captured Fader Sub Inhibited The inhibitive submaster if any which is controlling the level of the channel Dimmers The dimmers assigned to the channel as space per mits chapter 6 CUES This chapter includes instructions on recording modifying and deleting cues After you select channels and set their intensity levels you can store the resulting look as a cue You can play cues back in a timed fader Express allows you to record up to 600 cues per show This chapter contains the following sections Cue types Record functions Creating cues Viewing cues Working with cues in Stage mode Recording a cue in Stage Working with cues in Blind mode Recording a cue in Blind Recording a cue with a single fade time Recording a cue with split fade times Recording a cue with a wait time Recording cues with Link and Follow Recording a cue using Solo Modifying a recorded cue live Modifying cue attributes Using Update to modify a cue Deleting cues Copying cues Inserting cues Cue List 48 Express User Manual Cue types Type displays the fade type options described below The menu that appears in Stage omits the effect and subroutine options Effects and sub routines are explained in their own chapters To select a cue fade type in Stage Blind or Fader modes press Typel and enter an option number If you change a cue s fade type y
183. le then 111111 Enter to insert and record the same cue 1 1 as above produces the results illustrated in Figure 5 Compare it to the results illustrated in Figure 4 in which the same cue was inserted using Record rather than Track Chan1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chan5 Cue 1 50 Cue 1 1 50 50 Cue 2 50 FF 50 Cue 3 50 FF FF 50 Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Figure 5 Channel 4 creates a track from the cue after 1 1 until a pre recorded level interrupts it 80 Express User Manual Blackout cues and tracking Sometimes you may add a channel to a sequence of cues that has not used that channel yet For example you may want to add a channel to all cues in a scene To do this add the channel to the first cue in the sequence and use Track to track the change through the remaining cues However the last cue in sequence may be a blackout cue When you track the channel the new channel tracks until it runs into a different recorded level To ensure that channels are not tracked through a blackout cue make the blackout cue an allfade cue An allfade cue assigns a level of zero to any unused channels This blocks any potential tracks An allfade cue also clears the opposite fader Figure 6 displays what happens when we track channel 5 through the sequence when cue 5 is a regular crossfade cue Chan1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chan5 Cue 1 50 FF Cue 1 1 50 50 FF Cue 2 50 FF 00 FF Cue 3 50 FF FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 0
184. lete in Stage Delete Cue in Blind Enter number of cue to delete This is optional if you wish to delete the cur rently selected cue To delete just the current cue press Enter To delete the current cue and any channels that track from that cue press Track Enter Press Enter Action Selects display mode Prompt reads To Delete cue press ENTER Delete cue and tracking press TRACK ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects cue to delete Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Deletes cue For more information on tracking see Chapter 7 Track page 73 68 Copying cues Express User Manual In some cases you may want to copy a cue s channel levels and use them as the foundation for a new cue To copy cue follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Stage or Blind Press Cue 1 If you are in Stage display press Go Press Record Press Cue 2 Press Enter Actions Selects display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Cue 2 Cue copy is complete Channel levels have been copied from cue 1 to cue 2 You can now modify the new cue Note You may also copy a look from a cue to a submaster or a group To do so press Sub or Group in place of Cue in step 5 chapter 6 cues Inserting cues
185. line reads At 0 Enter Full Mwait2 M this macro s macro number Turn off all lights except work lights This macro captures all channels and sets them to zero This overrides all faders and submasters Then the macro sets work lights at full You can easily return to previous settings by pressing Rell to release captured channels Channel 1 Thru 7 At 0 Enter Channel Full Macro line reads Chan 1 Thru At 00 Enter Chan Full work lights channel Clear faders and turn work lights on This macro clears both faders and selects work lights Clear AB Clear CD Channel Full Macro line reads Clear AB Clear CD Chan Full work lights channel Clear unused channels in Flexichannel mode This macro clears channels that are visible but no longer in use Because this macro uses a softkey you must create it using Learn Setup 1 Enter S1 Stage Macro line reads Setup 1 Enter PurgeFlexi Stage Record show on disk This macro records the current show on disk Setup 3 Enter 1 Enter Enter Macro line reads Setup 3 Enter 1 Enter Enter chapter 15 diskette functions 02 35 PM 1 Write Show To Disk 2 Read Show From Disk 3 4 Format Disk 82 3 34 5 S6 S7 8 a ee ee ee ee This chapter includes instructions for using Express s diskette options Express is equipped with a 3 5 inch high density diskette drive on the console s right end panel It allows you to
186. ll the Remote Video Interface follow these steps 1 Plug the network cable into the appropriate connector 2 Plug the power cable into a grounded 120 VAC outlet 3 If necessary set DIP switches as described below The Remote Video Interface provides ports for remote accessories It sup ports one monitor the connector labeled CRT 1 is active an alphanu meric keyboard and an RFU The illustrations below show the Remote Video Interface s front and back panels and indicate the connector used by each accessory A CRT Displays g Switched Outlets AC Input CRT1 120 VAC 50 60 Hz 120 VAC 50 60 Hz ETCNet En E RFU Keyboard Oo Digitizer Serial 6 254 SB N AN as T NY MS SZ J ETCNet Remote Video Interface front panel O ETCNet remote video interface pus H On Power off Doo rw OU all Console Cameron y appendix a installation 257 Remote Video Interface settings The RVI Processor Board is the lower circuit board in the Remote Video Interface RVI It contains one 8 switch DIP switch unit Under normal conditions these switches will never need to be changed RVI Video Board 12345678 00000000 OPEN DIP switches 096 O4UI RVI Processor Board If the settings get changed and you n
187. llation 249 Updating Express software Update procedure Express software updates are distributed on diskette Follow these steps to update the software in your Express console Make sure the diskette is the correct one for your console 1 Installing new console software clears all system memory Please save your current show 2 Turn the console off 3 Insert the console software diskette into your console s diskette drive 4 Turn the console back on The console displays the boot screen and automatically installs the software This process takes approximately one minute The console displays the following messages as the installation progresses Loading Erasing Flash Writing Flash Wait until the Stage display appears 5 Press Setup to confirm that the new software has been successfully installed The current software version is displayed in the lower right corner of the display This version number should match the number on the diskette If it does not repeat the procedure 6 Press 4 Enter S1 Reset System The update is complete Installation note In ETCNet networked systems where an Express console is connected to Remote Interfaces and or Remote Video Interfaces both the console and the remote device must have the same version software installed For instructions for upgrading remote device software see Installing remote unit software on page 259 If you have any questions or experience difficulties wh
188. ludes the following sections e Selecting one to one patch e Creating custom patch e Proportional patching e Assigning a profile to a dimmer e Capturing channels in Patch e Dimmer check e About Dimmer e Multiplexed dimmers e Patching to a Strand CD80 dimmer rack Express User Manual Selecting one to one patch The one to one patch assigns dimmer 1 to channel 1 dimmer 2 to channel 2 and so on If there are more dimmers than channels the one to one patch assigns the first extra dimmer to channel 1 the second extra dimmer to channel 2 and so on Follow these steps to select Express s default one to one patch Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup to display Selects Setup display the Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Functions Prompt reads Enter Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 9 Reset Patch Prompt reads 1 to 1 Enter To reset patch press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter to confirm Sets patch to default one to your selection of one to one patch one default patch or press Clear to cancel the opera tion Creating custom patch Express s custom patching capability allows you to create virtually any dimmer to channel configuration you like Groups of dimmers may be assigned to single channels but only one channel may be patched to a dimmer Hint If you use the same patch for several shows create the patch and record it on a disk before you record any cues Label
189. m within a range that you select The console applies a random rate to the assigned step time and to the step fade times To assign random rate and to select your maximum and minimum rates from O percent to 2 000 percent follow the steps below Keystroke Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press S7 More Soft Displays available attributes keys S8 Attribute across the bottom of the screen 3 Press S7 Random Rate Prompt reads Select low random rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal 4 Enter the slowest desired Prompt reads effect rate Press Enter Select high random rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal 5 Enter the highest desired effect rate 6 Press Enter Prompt reads Select step number Note You can control an effect s rate by adjusting the rate of the submas ter or cue in which the effect is recorded Adjusting the rate does not affect the overall Up Dwell Down times for the cue or submaster lt does however speed up or slow down the individual steps For more information about controlling cue or submaster rates see pages 96 and 130 chapter 12 effects 147 Modifying effects Express allows you to modify recorded effects by adding or deleting effect steps changing step attributes and adding or deleting step ele ments Inserting steps You can insert a new step at any point in an effect For example to insert a step between steps 4 and 5 follow these steps
190. macro allows you to record a series of keystrokes and later replay it with one or two keystrokes This can simplify complex tasks that you perform often You can program up to 2 000 macros in Express depending on how large they are Insert Mode Macro 1 u dit 11 04 AM Operation s Setup 1 Enter Enter 0 Enter Enter Stage Setup 1 Enter 7 Enter 1 Enter Enter Stage Bump24 Setup 1 Enter 0 Enter DWS Sliders Stage M6 Bump1 Mwait O Bump2 Mwait 0 Bump3 Mwait 0 Bump4 Mwait 0 BumpS Mwait 0 Bump6 Mwait 0 Bump Mwait 0 Bump8 Mwait 0 Bump9 Mwait 0 Bump10 Mwait O Bump11 Mwait O Bump12 Mwait O Bump13 Mwait O Bump14 Mwai t 0 Bump15 Mwait 0 Bump16 Mwait O Bump1 Mwait O Bump18 Mwait 0 Bump19 Mwait O Bump20 Mwait 0 Bump21 Mwait 0 Bump22 Mwait 0 Bump23 M6 Setup 1 Enter PurgeF lexi Stage Macro Rep En Macro Softkey This chapter includes the following sections e Creating macros e Playing macros e Modifying macros e Clearing macros e Copying macros e Sample macros 160 Express User Manual Creating macros There are two ways to create a macro You can create it in Macro display mode entering and editing keystrokes without actually executing the instructions or you can use Express s Learn mode to record a sequence of keystrokes as you perform the operation You can include any key or button on the console except Enter Macro in a macro You cannot enter slider settings or wheel movements Each macro can contain up to 50 keystro
191. mber and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 2 Enters the group number you want to record Corner reads Group 2 4 Press Enter Records group 2 chapter 10 groups 101 Creating a group using Solo To create a group using some of the channels on stage but not all record the group using Solo To do this select the channels to add to the group then press Solo Follow these steps to create a group containing channels 5 through 20 when channels 1 through 25 are active on stage Keystrokes 1 2 8 Press Stage Press 1 Thru 2 5 Full Enter 5 Thru 2 01 Press S7 More Soft keys S8 Solo Press Record Group Press 3 Press Enter Press S8 Solo Action Selects Stage display mode Sets channels 1 through 25 to full on stage Selects channels 5 through 20 All other channels remain unselected Prompt reads Select excepted channel number All channels other than those selected drop to zero Prompt reads To restore levels press SOLO Select channel numbers Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Enters the group number you want to record Corner reads Group 3 Records selected channels into group 3 Restores full look to stage Hint Press Except Sub 1 in step 2 to deselect channels contributed by submaster 1 102 Express User Manual Displaying groups on stage To view a re
192. mode e Curve indicates the output curve assigned to the dimmer equals 00 Rack indicates the number of the rack where the dimmer is located Slot indicates the number of the slot in the rack where the dimmer is located e Panic mode indicates whether the dimmer is assigned to a panic cir cuit indicates an unassigned dimmer e Boost indicates the dimmer s Boost level of 100 percent indicates a Boost level Up to 16 dimmers are shown on the display at once along with error mes sages associated with each dimmer Press S5 Select Dimmer Enter to select a specific dimmer or use and to move through the list of dimmers a page at a time 208 Express User Manual Setting and unsetting dimmers If your console is connected to an ETC Sensor dimming system by an ETCLink network you may use your console to set and unset dimmers at the dimmer rack Note For more information on setting dimmers see the Sensor CEM User Manual Setting a dimmer To set a dimmer or group of dimmers to a level at the dimmer rack ignor ing any DMX512 outputs follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 3 Press S7 Set Dimmer Prompt reads Select dimmer number s to set then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Enter the dimmers you Prompt reads wish to set and press Select dimmer level
193. n effect is active The illustration below shows the fader status display Cue Dw Hold EF Step 6 Flash Flash is softkey S8 in the Stage display S8 Flash sets the selected channel s level to 100 percent if the channel is currently at a level at or below 50 percent If the channel s level is above 50 percent Flash sets it to zero Levels set by Flash are only maintained while the key is pressed For example press Channel 5 then press and hold S8 Flash to set channel 5 to either 100 or zero Use and to advance the channel while Flash is pressed Example 4 S8 Flash flashes channel 4 Flexichannel Express s Command display can be set to operate in full display mode or in Flexichannel mode In full display mode channel displays show all chan nels and their current status In Flexichannel mode independent flipped and linked channels and channels with a recorded level appear Express defaults to full channel display Flexichannel may be enabled or disabled from the System Settings menu appendix d reference 281 Flip Flip is softkey S2 in the Channel Attributes display Use S2 Flip to mark a channel flipped The flipped channels will have their outputs inverted The levels will not appear inverted on the Stage dis play See Flipped channels for more information Flipped channels The Flip command in the Channel Attributes display inverts the output of the channel to which it i
194. n press submaster 2 s bump but ton 5 Press Rell 6 Slide submaster slider to zero then back to full Express User Manual in Blind follow these steps Actions Selects Blind display Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Brings up current level settings for submaster 1 Prompt reads Select channel numbers Sets new levels Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Changes to submaster 1 are recorded in Stage follow these steps Actions Selects Stage display Submaster 2 s channels rise on stage to recorded levels New levels are set on stage Submaster 2 is recorded with the new levels Submaster LED blinks indicating that submaster 2 has been changed and the changes have not been loaded Releases newly set levels Loads submaster 2 s new levels and brings them up on stage chapter 11 submasters 129 Using Update to modify submasters The Update feature allows you to easily record changed levels on Stage into a selected submaster You may record all levels on Stage into the sub master or you may record only changes to channels that were previously recorded in the submaster Note When you use Update to modify a submaster the updated submas ter takes control of all stage levels for channels in the submaster Follow these steps to update a submaster Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stage S
195. n types of fixtures or incorporate a preferred response in a fade The ten curves are listed below If you do not select a profile all dimmers use profile zero a linear fade Follow these instructions to assign a profile to a dimmer Keystrokes 1 Press Patch 2 If the Dim LED is unlit press Dim to indicate that the next number entered will be a dimmer 3 Use the keypad to enter the desired dimmer num ber s Use And and Thru if you want to select more than one dimmer 4 Press S7 Profile then use the keypad to enter the number of the desired profile Profile numbers are listed on menu at the top of the Patch screen Note To reset profile to a linear fade assign profile zero to the dimmer Dimmer profiles O Linear 1 IES square 2 Slow bottom 3 Fast bottom 4 Slow top 5 Fast top 6 Full at 1 7 Preheat 5 8 Preheat 10 9 Hot patch Action Selects Patch display Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile Prompt reads Select dimmer profile number Dimmer intensity jumps from 0 to 100 at 1 output t Dimmer at 5 or 10 whenever console power is on Dimmer inten sity increases when output exceeds 5
196. n your system set system modes and screen for mats and choose default settings for a variety of console functions The following illustration shows default settings Number of Dimmers Number of Channels Default Fade Time Up 5 Down 5 Default Level Full Default Fader Clear Time 10 Default Sneak Time 5 Blackout Key Enab led F lex ichanne Disabled Master Type Grandmas ter Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 12 24 hour clock 12 Hour AM PM Record Lockout Disabled Bump keys Enab led Flexi Return This chapter includes the following sections Setting number of dimmers Setting number of channels Setting default fade times Setting default Level Setting default fader clear times Setting default Sneak time Blackout key Selecting Flexichannel mode Master Type Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 Selecting time format Record Lockout Bump keys Setting clock Express User Manual Setting number of dimmers One of the first steps in configuring Express is to enter the number of dimmers in your system Express defaults to 1 024 dimmers the maximum number of dimmers the console can address Follow these steps to select up to 1 024 dimmers Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Set Selects System Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Select 1 Number of Prompt reads Dimmers and press Select number of dimmers Enter then press ENTER 4 Press 8 0 0
197. n4 Chan5 Cue 1 50 Cue 2 50 FF Cue 3 50 FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Figure 3 The modified level is recorded in the current cue and carries through the entire track cues 1 through 3 Express User Manual Inserting cues If you insert a cue in this sequence Record and Track produce different results Record saves changes only in the cue you insert Track saves the changes you make and tracks them through the following cues The following keys were pressed to release captured channels and play back cue 1 With cue 1 in a fader channel 4 is added at 50 percent The new look is inserted as cue 1 1 Stage Rel Rel Release captured channels Cue 1 Go Play back cue 1 Chan 4 At 5 0 Add channel 4 at 50 percent Record 111 111 Enter Inserts new look as cue 1 1 Figure 4 displays the result inserting the cue using Record Notice the new channel is not added to the cues that follow it Chan1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chan5 Cue 1 50 Cue 1 1 50 50 Cue 2 50 FF 00 Cue 3 50 FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Figure 4 Note that Express enters a level of 00 percent for channel 4 in cue 2 This fades channel 4 out when cue 2 is played chapter 7 track 79 When you insert a cue with Track new channels track through the cues after it until Express encounters a cue with a level previously recorded for that channel Pressing Track rather than Record as in the previous examp
198. nd immediately In order to accept MSC commands the console s receiver Device ID must match the target device ID for the MIDI device sending the signals Go If no cue number is sent Go presses A B Go on Express The next cue on the cue list runs in the A B fader If a cue number is sent the specified cue runs on the A B fader If a cue number is sent and 2 is sent as the list entry that cue runs on the C D fader If cue 0 is sent and 2 is sent as the list entry the com mand presses C D Go The pending cue runs in the C D fader You may also press A B Go by sending Go Cue 0 1 Stop The Stop command by itself holds all fades in both fader pairs If Stop is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 1 only the cue running in the A B fader holds If Stop is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 2 only the cue running in the C D fader holds The cue number field is ignored but must be included if a list entry is sent Resume The Resume command by itself resumes all holding fades in both fader pairs If Resume is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 1 only a cue holding in the A B fader resumes If Resume is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 2 only the cue holding in the C D fader resumes The cue number field is ignored but must be included if a list entry is sent Fire The Fire command executes a specified macro Macro number must be in the range 1 1
199. ndix d reference 277 Delete Step Delete Step is softkey S6 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Effect and Blind Subroutine displays Press S6 Delete Step to delete the selected step or a specified step Example S6 Delete Step 4 Enter Enter deletes step 4 Example S6 Delete Step Enter Enter deletes the selected step Delete Sub Delete Sub is softkey S6 in the Blind Submaster and Sub List displays Use S6 Delete Sub to clear a suomaster of its recorded or loaded con tents Example S6 Delete Sub Enter Enter unloads the selected submas ter Example Sub List S6 Delete Sub 1 Thru 8 Enter Enter unloads subs 1 8 Dimmer Use Dim to start a dimmer check or to change dimmer patch assignments Example Dim 1 At Full Enter Example Patch Dim 6 Channel 7 Enter Dimmer Status Dimmer Status is softkey S5 in the System Status and Rack Status displays Use S5 Dimmer Status to Check information about your dimmers including size and type recorded load firing mode output curve rack slot panic mode and boost Disable ETCLink Disable ETCLink is softkey S1 in the Dimmer Monitoring Functions display Use S1 Disable ETCLink to turn off dimmer monitoring Softkey then becomes Enable ETCLink Disable MIDI Disable MIDI is softkey S1 in the Options Settings display Use S1 Disable MIDI to disable either ETC MIDI or MIDI
200. new to lighting consoles or to Express in particular read chap ters 5 through 11 for instructions on setting channel levels and using cues groups and submasters These are the building blocks for creating and running any show Once you are comfortable with these functions chap ters 12 through 22 provide more advanced information on effects subrou tines macros Experienced users Once you are familiar with the system refer to Appendix D Glossary and the console s Help function for answers to any remaining questions you may have Using Help Help screens are available for all Express keys including softkeys and wheels To display help screens press Help then press any key on the console Text conventions In this manual console keys are indicated by square brackets such as Enter Messages that appear on the console displays are printed in bold face such as Select channel References to other sections of the manual are printed in italics such as Chapter 1 Introduction Output level conventions In almost every case Express uses a highest level or pile on convention to determine levels for channels affected by more than one output Express reads all output levels it receives for a specific channel and sets that channel to the highest one A level setting entered on the keypad however takes priority over almost any other input For example if a channel is included in both a submaster and a cue that has playe
201. ng cues or submasters aS groupS 2 anana anaana 111 Using groups to modify cues or submasters in Blind 112 OD ened eevee beet heed ehh Reged Oe Wine il ah to hai 113 GlOUPSEISE Aah siete tt See SNe esto AMA at ds eshte dc 114 Chapter 11 SUDINASTONS 1 oyn wore oan Sie Mead SEN hoe ole 115 Submasteriypesa ih ade Conte da Dal a dae aes de he 116 Pilen s bmaste speak edge a ae ER Pet hes 116 Inhibitive submaster 0 0 0 0 ns 116 Effect SUMAS 24 eked ooh oe eee ha RO OR OE 116 CHangingQ tyPe Ah eel rd a a e es adn a ay 2 a 117 Submaster DADES sic co tie hed aes e welled Geek 118 Submaster LEDS a ti aio ined is de e 119 Submaster bump buttons s aasan anaana reana 120 Bump button statuS 0 0 ns 120 Recording SUDMaStErs goss rosent eek a a a eS 121 Fade and dwell times for submasters 121 Adding a rate to a SUDMASTeT o o oooooooooooo 125 Specifying a submaster S Page 0 00002 125 Using Except to record a submaster without another submaster s A A A eas E Soe tatln sade ode NA sg 126 Creating inhibitive submasters 2 00000 00000 eee eee 127 Modifying submasters in Blind nnana anaana aaaeeeaa 128 Modifying submasters in Stage 0 2 0 0 ce 128 Using Update to modify submasters 200 129 Live control of asubmaster s rate 0 eee 130 Controlling submaster fades manually o o o 130 COPyING SUD
202. ng label level and profile settings press Setup 4 Enter and select Clear Show and Patch or press S1 Reset System To reset your patch follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter 3 Press 9 Reset Patch Prompt reads 1 to 1 Enter To reset patch press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Patch is reset Returns to Setup menu chapter 17 clear functions 191 Channel Attributes Clear Channel Attributes erases all channel attribute information from a show To erase all channel attribute information follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 1111 Clear Chan Prompt reads nel Attribute Enter To clear channel attributes press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Channel attribute settings are cleared Returns to Setup menu Real Time Programs Clear Real Time Programs erases all program information from a show To erase all programs follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 1 2 Clear SMPTE Prompt reads Events Ente
203. nt At Use At to enter the intensity for a selected dimmer channel or group Example Channel 1 And 4 At 4 5 sets channels 1 and 4 at 45 per cent Attribute Attribute is softkey S8 after S7 More Softkeys in the Effect display Use S8 Attribute to access the effect attribute selection softkeys B is softkey S3 in the Patch and Dimmer Monitoring Functions dis plays S6 B allows selection of the B output of a multiplex dimmer Example Patch Dimmer 1 S6 B At 7 5 gives the B half of multi plex dimmer 1 a patch level of 75 percent appendix d reference 273 Back Use Back to replace the cue in the fader with the previous cue Blackout Press Blackout to reduce all channel outputs on stage to zero Press Blackout again to restore lights Independent channels are not affected by Blackout Blind The Blind display allows you to create and modify cues groups and sub masters without affecting current live levels Blind also allows you to create effects and subroutines Bounce effect Bounce is softkey S4 in the attribute list of the Effect display Use S4 Bounce to create an effect that alternates between a forward chase and a reverse chase If the effect is not assigned the reverse attribute the first pass will be forward the second reverse the third for ward etc If the effect is assigned the reverse attribute the first pass will be reverse the second forward
204. nt 4 While holding S8l press Flashes each channel in turn or to select the next or previous channel 5 Once you have checked all the channels release S8 Flash Note You may start a channel check with any channel Substitute the desired channel in step 2 Note If a channel is Independent it will not Flash chapter 5 setting channel levels About 45 About provides you with information about channels The following pages describe the use of About and the information available in the About channel window Note See page 31 for information on using About Dimmer About Channel About Channel provides attribute and status information for a selected channel To display the About Channel window follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press About Channel 2 Press 6 3 Press Enter Action Prompt reads About Select channel number then press ENTER Keypad corner reads Chan 6 About Channel window is dis played 46 Express User Manual About Channel 1 Label The channel s label Attributes Whether or not the channel is flipped or independent First used The first cue in which this channel appears Last used The highest numbered cue in which this channel ap pears Number of cues The total number of cues in which this channel appears Number of moves The total number of cues in which this channel moves Level The channel s current level Source The contro
205. nter 4 Use the keypad to enter the first submaster in the range to print Press Enter 5 Use the keypad to enter the last submaster in the range to print Press Enter Action Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all sub masters or press PAGE to select submasters to print Prompt reads Select submaster page to print then press ENTER 1 Page 1 2 Page 2 0 All pages Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all submasters or select 1st submaster to print Prompt reads Press ENTER to print submaster or select last submaster to print File sent to the printer 180 Cue List Express User Manual Cue List prints a list of cues recorded in the currently loaded show as well as all cue attributes Cues are listed by number To print a full cue list print out follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 5 Print Functions Enter Press 5 Print Cue List Enter Press Enter or press Clear to cancel the print operation Group List Action Displays Setup menu Displays Print Functions menu Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR File sent to the printer Print Group List prints a list of groups recorded in the currently loaded show Groups are listed by number Information provided includes each group s label To print a full group list printout follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 5 Print F
206. nutes If you do not enter a time the downfade will match the upfade Follow time Follow time is the time between the start of one step and the start of the next Follow times may range from 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes chapter 13 subroutines Creating subroutines 155 Each subroutine can hold up to 100 steps Each step lists a cue or a style To create a subroutine follow these steps Keystrokes 1 andma SR Create the cues you want to use in your subroutine Press Blind You must be in Blind mode to create subroutines Press Cue 7 Press Type Press 4 Subroutine Express displays the screen illustrated below ter 100 Step Subrout ine Time Subrout ine e Type Step Teh 6 Press 1 gt Action Displays Blind mode screen Selects cue 7 to be your subrou tine cue Displays fade type menu Prompt reads Select fade type 1 Crossfade 2 Allfade 3 Effect or 4 Subroutine Select subroutine fade type Prompt reads Select step num ber s then press ENTER Time Wait 5 t10 Link Follow Rate Gunshot 7 Press 1 gt 8 Press 1 Selects step 1 Prompt reads Enter cue number to fade or press STYLE to change step type Selects cue 1 for step 1 of the subroutine Prompt reads Enter type of cue 1 Crossfade 2 Allfade Designates cue as a crossfade within the subroutine Prompt reads Enter intensity 156
207. o full in a cue or submaster the dimmer will output at 60 percent Follow these steps to assign a proportional dimmer output level Keystrokes TE 2 Press Patch If the Dim LED is unlit press Dim to indicate that the next number entered will be a dimmer Use the keypad to enter the desired dimmer num ber s Use And and Thru if you want to select more than one dimmer Press At Use the keypad to enter the desired maximum output level for the dim mer s Full is displayed until a new level is entered Enter a zero before single digit levels i e 08 Action Selects Patch display Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile Prompt reads Select dimmer level Dimmer s proportional level is set Note If the dimmer s level is highlighted white on red you may use and to adjust the level Press Enter to record the edited level chapter 4 patch 27 Unpatching individual dimmers Channel zero is not an actual control channel It functions as a holding area in which you may store dimmers not included in your patch Before you begin creating a custom patch you may find it helpful to assign all dim mers to channel zero Then when
208. o remove a link from the Link List All subsequent links will be renumbered To delete a link follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 1 1 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display 2 Press S7 Link List Selects Link List display Prompt reads Select link number 3 Press S6 Delete Link Prompt reads Select link number s to delete then press ENTER Enter 0 to delete all links 4 Press 5 Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press Enter The link is deleted from the Link List All links with higher num bers are renumbered one lower 242 Express User Manual APPEndIX a installation This appendix includes instructions for installing your console and optional accessories Chapter 3 Entering system settings and Chapter 4 Creating patch include instructions for entering the software settings you will probably update before you begin a new show This chapter includes the following installation procedures Installing your console Installing your monitor Connecting your dimmers System configuration Installing the alphanumeric keyboard Installing a printer Installing Remote Focus Unit MIDI ETCNet Installing remote video monitors Installing Remote Macros Installing work lights An illustration of Express s back panel is included on the next page Oper ating instruction for optional accessories are included in Chapter 20 Accessories 244
209. oads may not be recorded on Sensor systems without the AF option See the Sensor CEM Users Manual for more information on recording loads from your dimming system 200 Express User Manual Recording dimmer loads When you Record Loads the system records load information only for the dimmers set at a level above zero Choose the dimmers you wish to record set them to a level then run Record Loads Record Loads records 24 dimmers per rack at a time until all dimmers at levels above zero have been recorded If you have multiple racks 24 dim mers in each rack are recorded simultaneously Note On single phase racks the system records 16 dimmers per rack at a time Caution Record Loads changes levels on stage Dimmer outputs rise and fall for several minutes during the procedure To cancel a Record Load operation that has already started press S7 Cancel Enter Follow these steps to Record Loads for your system Keystrokes Action 1 Set desired dimmers to a level above zero Only dim mers at levels above zero are recorded Press Setup Selects Setup display Select 9 ETCLink Func Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 4 Select 4 Load Manage Selects Load Management dis ment and press Enter play Note If you wish instead of setting the desired dimmers to a level in step 1 you may enter a list of dimmers to record in step 5 5 Press S5 Record Loads Prompt reads If you wi
210. ocess will not add new channels 5 Press S2 Update Group 6 To update only channels already recorded in the group press S4 Only 7 Press 5 Enter Actions Selects Stage display mode Selects group 5 Prompt reads Group mode Select group number to use as group Brings group 5 s channels up on stage Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit Selects channels and sets levels Prompt reads To update group select number and press ENTER Press ONLY ENTER to update only those channels already in group Limits update to channels already in group Updates channel levels in group 5 chapter 10 groups 109 Deleting groups You must be in Stage mode to delete individual groups To delete all groups you can use the Clear Groups option from the Clear Functions menu as described in Chapter 18 Clear Functions on page 188 To delete individual groups follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display 2 Press S7 More Soft Prompt reads keys S6 Delete To delete group press ENTER Group To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 2 Enters group number to delete Corner reads Group 2 4 Press Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press Enter to delete the Group 2 is deleted from your group or Clear to cancel show the action 110 Express User Manual Copying
211. on is available on Sensor Advanced Features dim ming systems e Recorded lamp load The load at which the selected dimmer was re corded e Load at full The estimated load on the dimmer when the level is at Full e Actual load The actual load currently on the dimmer e Boost The dimmer s boost level if any e Dimmer error Current dimmer errors if any chapter 4 patch 33 Multiplexed dimmers ETC s Multiplex dimming technology can increase the capacity of your dimming system The ETC Multiplexer converts the output of a single ETC Sensor or L86 dimmer into two separate signals Both signals then pro vide discrete levels for two ETC Source Four lighting fixtures Warning The DMX512 port that serves the dimmer must be in multiplex mode Setting the port to multiplex mode erases your current patch Set the port mode BEFORE you create your patch To set the port s mode see Setting Multiplex mode on page 248 Before you create your patch you must identify any dimmers whose sig nals are multiplexed Express indicates the split by adding an A or B to the dimmer number Follow these steps to multiplex a dimmer Keystrokes Action 1 Press Patch Selects Patch display 2 If the Dim LED is unlit Prompt reads press Dim to indicate that Select dimmer numbers then the next number entered press ENTER to assign to a will be a dimmer channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile 3 Use t
212. on of the key s function Hold Hold is softkey S2 in the Sub List and Cue List displays Press S2 Hold when entering Submaster bump button dwell fade times or cue effect dwell times Hold causes a faded submaster to stay active until you press the bump button again A flashing LED indicates that a submaster is holding Hold causes an effect to hold until you press the clear button controlling the effect to fade the effect out appendix d reference 283 Hold fader Use the fader Hold to interrupt a fade Press Go to resume or Hold to cancel the fade execution Example Cue 5 Go Hold Go starts cue 5 pauses it then resumes its fade Hold for Go subroutine A subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Hold for go step It then pauses until you press Go In Dwell Out In Dwell Out is softkey S3 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Ef fect display Use S3 In Dwell Out to access the fade time field for selected step s The first time value is the fade in time the second is the dwell time and the third is the fade out time for the step Alternatively the arrow buttons can be used to move through the display Example Step 6 S3 In Dwell Out 1 gt 2 gt 1 sets an in time of one second a dwell of two seconds and an out time of one second for step 5 Independent Independent is softkey S 1 in the Link List display Use S1 Independent to mark a channel independent
213. on selected remote devices To update the software on multiple remote devices use the arrow keys to move through the list of devices When the device you want to update is highlighted press S8 Mark This Unit to select that device An M appears to the left of the device name indicating that this device has been selected for updating Repeat this procedure for each device you want to update then press S2 Update Marked to update the software in each of the marked devices Updating software on a single remote device To update the software on a single remote device use the arrow keys to select the device then press S3 Update This Unit Under the Status column in the Remote Units list the percentage of completion will be shown When the word Pass is visible the update process is done 5 Remove the Remote Unit Update disk from the console diskette drive 6 Turn the console off and then back on again The process is complete If you have any questions or experience difficulties while upgrading please call ETC s Technical Services department at 800 775 4382 260 Express User Manual Installing remote video monitors You may want to install additional monitors at remote locations Install monitors by connecting them to any interface devices on ETCNet Addi tional monitors duplicate the master console s displays in remote loca tions Connect monitors to interface devices by following these steps 1 Insert the female end of
214. on the trackpad White Channel not selected by Only function Channel output levels White on Red Selected channel Level instructions from the keypad or the trackpad affect this channel s level Yellow Channel output level was set by a submaster White Channel output level was set by an effect In Tracksheet and Blind white channel levels were set by an Allfade cue Gray Channel was recorded into a multipart cue but not in the currently displayed part Blind only Red Channel has been de selected but its current level was established using the keypad Green Channel output level is changed from what it was in the previous cue In Tracksheet and Blind only channel output is lower than it was in the previous cue Magenta Channel output level is the same as it was in the previous cue tracking Blue In Tracksheet and Blind only channel output level is higher than it was in the previous cue Changing pages S4 Previous Page and S5 Next Page softkeys allow you to change pages on many displays The arrow keys may also be used to switch from page to page Pressing 4 takes you to the first page pressing T takes you to the previous page pressing J takes you to the next page and pressing gt takes you to the final page Stage Ose Y chapter 2 monitor displays The Stage display shows y
215. ons for selection of control lists Full function Level sets a channel to a user selectable default value Channel Attribute display provides Independent Flip channel and channel Label attributes Cue functions Up to 600 cues numbered 1 to 999 9 Discrete upfade and downfade times 00 00 99 59 for each cue Linked cue sequences Effect cues Split wait times Follow time Link to cue or macro Eight part multipart cues Selective cue recording Update cue command Attribute range editing Subroutines Group functions Up to 500 groups Any cue or submaster may be accessed as a group appendix c specifications 269 Diskette drive e 3 5 inch high density diskette drive for show storage e One show per disk e Software updates installed through diskette drive Macro functions Up to 2 000 macro selections for programming Macros may activate any key on the console Live Learn mode Blind editing Macros programmable for Macro wait Real Time Clock event programming Powerup macro Remote Trigger function e eee8 o o Effects functions Up to 100 steps each Variability of rate during playback Step times In Dwell Out Step fade times High Low Levels In Dwell Out Effect fade time Effects may be recorded as cues or submasters Range editing of effect attributes and step values Profile functions e Ten preset profiles e Profiles may be assigned to dimmers Options Parallel printer Remote Focus Unit Remote V
216. ore Softkeys in the Blind Sub routine display Press S4 Type Level to select between crossfade and allfade steps in a subroutine cue Press again to specify a final fade level of less than 100 Example Step 1 S4 Type Level 2 Enter sets the step as an allfade cue Example Step 3 Select Cue 8 S4 Type Level S4 Type Level 5110 will fade cue 8 to 50 percent of its recorded level Unpatch Unpatch is softkey S6 in the Patch display Use S6 Unpatch to unpatch patch to channel 0 selected dimmers Example Dimmer 5 S6 Unpatch Enter unpatches dimmer 5 Example S6 Unpatch Dimmer 7 Enter unpatches dimmer 7 Unset Dimmer Unset Dimmer is softkey S6 in the Dimmer Monitoring Functions dis la Use S6 Unset Dimmer to return a dimmer or group of dimmers to normal dimming This requires a system connected by ETCLink to a Sensor dimming system Up Arrow Use T to move through various displays such as Stage Blind effects and macro mode appendix d reference 299 Up Down Follow Up Down Follow is softkey S8 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Subroutine display Use S8 Up Down Follow to assign upfade and downfade times and to specify amount of time to hold before beginning the next subroutine step Example Step 1 S8 Up Down Follow 2 S8 Up Down Follow 4 S8 Up Down Follow 5 Enter assigns an upfade time of two sec onds and a downfade t
217. ou must re record the cue For example Cue 2 Type 2 Record Enter records cue 2 with an allfade If you do not enter a fade type cues default to crossfade Crossfade In a crossfade cue channel levels that increase fade to their new level in the assigned upfade time Channel levels that decrease fade to their new level in the assigned downfade time The cue starts when you press Go You may use a wait time to delay the start of the upfade or downfade Allfade An allfade cue forces all unused channels to zero intensity when you press Go and clears the other fader Allfade is useful for forcing an end cue when tracking channels For more information on using allfade cues for tracking see Chapter 7 Track Subroutine A subroutine is a cue that controls the playback of a series of recorded cues Subroutines are similar to linked cues except that you have more playback options For more information on using subroutines see Chapter 13 Working with subroutines Effects An effect cue contains an effect Effects allow you to assign channels to aseries of steps When you play back the effect the steps run in assigned chase patterns or in random order For more information on using effects see Chapter 12 Working with effects chapter 6 cues 49 Record functions Express has two record functions Record and Track Record saves all channels as they appear on the screen what you see is what you get in the cue
218. ou the current levels of all active chan nels Up to 125 channels can appear on the display at a time O Grandmaster 100 Sub Page 1 001 02 03 04 05 06 007 025 26 27 28 29 30 031 049 50 51 52 53 54 O55 073 74 75 76 77 78 079 Fader A B 100 Clear Cue Port Time Wait Li Grandmaster O 11 08 09 10 11 12 32 33 34 35 36 56 57 58 59 60 80 81 82 83 84 Fader C D Cue Comp le nk Follow Rate AM 013 14 15 16 17 037 38 39 40 41 061 62 63 64 65 66 085 86 87 88 89 Cue Type Time 5 5 Wait ti Link Follow Rate Gunshot Toad ex ES He ers 11 PT 25 Update Rate Sub Softkeys Current Grandmaster setting Blackout alert and submaster page Display mode Current display mode and time Keypad corner Indicates how the console will interpret the next number entered from the keypad For example if you press Channel the corner displays Chan indicating that the console will read the next number as a channel number If you enter a range only the last number in the range will appear Channel level display Current level of a Prompt area ll channels Information and prompts appear here Fader status Indicates current status of both fader pairs Shows cue run ning in fader fade times percentage of completion and follow times Attribute bar Shows current settings for selected cue group or submaster Softkeys Stage functions for S1 through S8
219. oup You may record all levels on Stage into the group or you may record only changes to channels that were previously recorded in the group You may also add specific new channels to the group at their current Stage levels to add all channels on Stage to the group at their current levels Using Update to add new channels to a group You may use Update to add new channels to an existing group To do so you must specify the channels you wish to add Follow these steps to use Update to add channels Keystrokes 1 2 Press Stage Select channels to add to the group and set their lev els Press S2 Update Group Press 2 Press Channel Specify the channels to add In this case press 5 Thru 1 101 Press Enter Actions Selects Stage display mode Alters look Prompt reads To update group select number and press ENTER Press ONLY ENTER to update only those channels already in group Selects group 2 to update Corner reads Group 2 Prompt reads To update channel s select number s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Chan 10 Updates group 2 to include chan nels 5 through 10 Express User Manual Using Update to change levels in a group Follow these steps to use Update to modify channels in a group Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press Group 5 3 Press Full 4 Change the levels for the channels you want to modify in the group This pr
220. p select the number and set to a level To create or modify a group select the number and press ENTER Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press clear Records submaster 2 with group 3 s channels added Submaster 2 now contains channels 1 through 10 at 75 percent in addi tion to whatever other channels are already part of it If any of the chan nels between 1 and 10 were already included their levels were modified to match those in the group The same procedure can be used to combine groups and cues Groups can also be used as elements in effects Anywhere you set channel levels you can use a group to select those channels and set their levels chapter 10 groups Only 113 Only allows you to select several groups and then adjust only the channels the groups have in common For example say you are working with moving lights Each fixture is controlled by a number of channels each of which controls a single parameter level tilt vertical movement pan hor izontal movement colors and so forth You create groups that contain all the control channels for each light as shown below In the example below each group contains six channels corresponding to pan tilt intensity cyan magenta and yellow for a specific fixture Group 1 contains all channels for fixture 1 01 02 03
221. part the channel will be placed in the new part and be removed from the older part automatically Upfade and downfade wait times in multipart cues allow you to program fades that do not start immediately when you play the multipart cue When you press Go to start a multipart cue some parts may start imme diately and others may start up to 99 59 minutes later depending on the assigned wait time The total duration of a multipart cue is equal to the combined wait and fade times of the longest part Note Multipart cues can be recorded in either Stage or Blind mode Multipart cues are stored like normal cues in the console s memory and on disk This chapter includes the following sections e Recording a multipart cue e Converting a standard cue to a multipart cue e Wait times in multipart cues e Editing a multipart cue 84 Express User Manual Recording a multipart cue Follow these steps to record a multipart cue Keystrokes 1 de Press Stage Press Channel select channels and enter channel levels then press Enter For example Channel 1 Thru 5 Full Press Record then enter the number of the cue you want to record For exam ple press 1 2 Press S7 More Soft keys S2 Part then use the keypad to enter the number of the part you want to record Parts can be assigned anumber from 1 to8 and can be created in any sequence Press Enter Repeat steps 2 through 5 a
222. pear if you attempt to run too many effects System Error This software version is incompatible with the existing hardware Please reload the correct version of software or contact your service representative for further assistance 264 Express User Manual ETCLink errors ETCLink provides advisory messages for a wide variety of conditions including information regarding your dimmers racks system data ports and loads These messages fall into two categories fatal messages and secondary messages Fatal messages deal with anything that could potentially terminate or dras tically change the look of your show You may set fatal messages to be displayed even when secondary messages have been disabled Secondary messages deal with individual dimmer problems and warnings of potential rack temperature problems These messages are generally less critical than the fatal messages If you wish secondary messages may be disabled without disabling fatal messages See Disabling second ary messages on page 212 for more information Fatal messages Dimmer has shut down due to an overtemperature condition The dimmer will remain shut down until the condition is cleared at the dimmer rack Use Dimmer Status to determine the rack number for the dimmer Rack DMX port A B failure Either there is a problem with the DMX cabling connections between the console and the rack or the rack has been configured incorrectly Rack A B C phase inp
223. play Selects System Settings menu Prompt reads Enter default sneak time Enter the time you wish to Sets the new default Sneak time assign as the Sneak time and press Enter Enable disable Blackout key Express s Blackout key may be enabled or disabled Express defaults to enabled Follow these steps to enable or disable Blackout Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter Select 8 Blackout Key and press Enter Press 1 or 0 Press Enter Action Selects Setup display Selects System Settings menu Prompt reads Enable disable blackout key 1 Enable 0 Disable Corner reads Black 1 Or Black 0 Blackout is enabled or disabled Express User Manual Enable disable Flexichannel Express s Command display can be set to operate in full display mode or in Flexichannel mode In full display mode channel displays show all chan nels and their current status In Flexichannel mode only channels with a recorded level appear Express defaults to full channel display Follow these steps to enable or disable Flexichannel Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter 3 Select 9 Flexichannel and press Enter 4 Press 1 or 0 5 Press Enter Updating Flexichannel Action Selects Setup display Selects System Settings menu Prompt reads Enable disable flexichannel 1
224. played as a yellow zero Follow these steps to create an inhibitive submaster Keystrokes Te 2 Press Stage Press Sub and enter the number of the submaster 13 to 24 you wish to be inhibitive Press Type Press 2 LED flashes unless slider is at zero Move slider to zero LED flashes Move slider to 10 Actions Selects Stage display Selects sub to change Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Prompt reads Select submaster type 1 Pile on 2 Inhibitive Other types are Blind only Channel levels change to IN and the submaster number is red Pile on levels are unloaded Inhibitive control is loaded Follow the same procedure to convert back to pile on You may include the same channel in more than one inhibitive sub master If you press an inhibitive submaster s bump button the submaster fades from its current slider location to zero and back using its record ed fade times Modifying submasters To modify a submaster in Blind Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Sub 1 3 Press Enter 4 Enter channel numbers and set desired new levels 5 Press Record 6 Press Enter Modifying submasters To modify a submaster in Stage Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Use the submaster slider to raise submaster 2 to full on stage 3 Enter channel numbers and set desired new lev els 4 Press Record the
225. plays the submaster back three times faster than its recorded fade time A rate of 50 causes it to play back half as fast as its recorded fade time You may assign a rate of up to 2 000 percent To add a rate to submaster 7 follow these steps Action Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Sub 7 Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE 3 Press S3 Rate Prompt reads Use keypad to select submaster rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal 4 Press 1 5 0 Corner reads Rate 150 5 Press Enterl Rate of 150 percent is recorded into submaster 7 Specifying a submaster s page You may specify the page to which you record submasters For example if page 1 is loaded you can record a submaster to page 2 To do so follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Create a look in Stage 2 Press Record Sub Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press Page 2 Prompt reads Select page on which to record submaster 1 Page 1 2 Page 2 then press submas ter bump button 4 Presssubmaster6 sbump Current levels are recorded into button submaster 6 on submaster page 2 126 Express User Manual Using Except to record a submaster without another submaster s channels Express allows you to program a submaster containing all the current levels on stage except for those contributed by a specific cue
226. ple S1 Step 5 Thru 9 Enter selects steps 5 through 9 Steps effect An effect may consist of up to 100 steps A step is made up of channels or groups also known as elements A step may contain up to ten ele ments For example channels 1 through 10 would constitute ten ele ments filling the step However a group containing channels 1 through 10 would constitute only one element allowing nine more channels or groups to be added Each step in an effect is assigned a high and low level a step time and an in dwell and out time Steps subroutine All subroutine steps are either cue steps or style steps A cue step con tains an existing recorded cue The subroutine lets you change levels and fade rates for the cue step without changing the original cues A cue step may contain an effect cue A style step contains an instruction that controls the subroutine s playback pattern This allows you to run loops run bounces pause the subroutine until you press go or end the subroutine and jump to any other cue Step Time Step Time is softkey S2 after S7 More Softkeys in the Blind Effect display Press S2 Step Time to access the Time field for the selected step s Step time is the time between the activation of the selected step and the next step Alternatively the arrow keys can be used to move through the display Example Step 5 S2 Step Time 2 Enter sets the step time of step 5 to 2 seconds
227. ps to create cues submasters effects or other groups The principal difference between a group and a cue is that a group cannot be played back through a fader or slider Consequently it has no fade times wait times or other playback attributes Group numbers are independent of cue numbers and may be numbered from 1 to 999 This chapter includes the following sections e Creating groups e Displaying groups on stage e Working with groups in Blind e Modifying groups e Deleting groups e Copying groups e Using cues or submasters as groups e Using groups to modify cues groups or submasters e Only e Group List 100 Express User Manual Creating groups You can create groups in Stage Blind and Fader modes To create a group follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Live display mode 2 Press 1 Thru 5 Full 6 Selects channels 1 through 9 and Thru 9 At 5 Enter sets them at proportional levels 3 Press Record Group Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 1 Enters the group number you want to record Corner reads Group 1 5 Press Enter Records group 1 Creating a group from the look on stage To create a group from the look that s already on stage follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Record Group Prompt reads To record group select nu
228. pt reads Select submaster type 1 Pile on 2 Inhibitive 3 Effect 4 Press 1 2 or 3 to New type is entered in submas select type ter status bar Type changes do not take effect while the submaster is active An active submaster s bump button LED blinks after you change its type To deac tivate it move its slider to zero or to 10 See Submaster LEDs on page 119 for more information about the LED 118 Express User Manual Submaster pages Express provides ten pages of submasters A page is a block of console memory that contains one set of 24 recorded submasters corresponding to the 24 submaster sliders The ten pages of memory increases the number of possible submasters to 240 Express displays the message Sub page 1 2 3 in the upper corner of the display to indicate the current submaster page To switch from one page to the other press Page enter the desired page number and press Enter When you switch submaster pages any submasters on stage remain on stage until you move their sliders to the home position Until the new sub master loads submaster LEDs flash slowly indicating that the submaster on stage is from the previously loaded page When you move the slider to its home position the new submaster is loaded and the LED stops flash ing This prevents the stage from going black or changing levels when you switch pages Fast flashes designate a submaster with a dwell time of Hold See Submaster LE
229. pter 18 accessories 195 Worklights Express provides two 3 pin female XLR type connectors for Littlite goose neck worklights Littlites come in 6 6X HI 12 12X HI and 18 inch 18X HI lengths and are available from ETC or your dealer The lamps require 12 volts AC or DC at 380 mA per 5 watt high intensity lamp Lamp life is rated with 12 volt supply and will decrease with higher voltage operation Control lamp intensity with the Lamps knob above the power switch on the back panel 196 Express User Manual chapter 19 SENSO dimming Express lighting control systems may be connected to ETC Sensor dim ming systems via the ETCLink communication network In this configura tion the Express can provide you with a wide range of system status information including overall system status and specific information about individual dimmer modules and dimmer racks You may access ETCLink through the ETCLink Functions menu Most of the dimmer rack and system information accessible through Express displays is also available from your Sensor dimming system through the Control Electronics Module CEM To reach the ETCLink Functions menu press Setup 9 Enter The following display appears 2 40 PM ETCLink Status Disabled Dimming S em Status gt Rack 4 Load Management gt Display Advisories Enob led 1 S S 83 84 5 S6 S7 88 ae a IN EEN Bos ETCL ink Dimmer Dimmer Return Enabling ETCLink Before
230. r To clear all real time clock programs press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Programs cleared Returns to Setup menu 192 Express User Manual Reset system Reset System erases all show information from the console resets your patch and resets all configuration information to factory defaults To reset Express follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Func Displays Clear Functions menu tions Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press S1 Reset System Prompt reads To clear entire system and reset to default settings press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter System resets and returns to Stage mode display chapter 18 ACCEeSsones This chapter includes instructions for working with the following Express accessories e Remote Focus Unit RFU e Worklights For accessory installation instructions see Appendix A Installation For purchase information please contact your local dealer or ETC 194 Express User Manual Remote Focus Unit RFU The Remote Focus Unit RFU is a small portable control panel you can use from a remote location such as in the house on your studio set or from backstage You can use an RFU with or without a remote monitor 2 Cue Chan Stage 1 1 5at75 M1 Stage Blind 7 8 9 Chan Dim A B
231. r modifications are not reflected in the fader you may want to run the cue through a fader before you release channels if you don t want to lose the look from stage Modifying cue attributes Follow these steps to modify cue attributes Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage or Blind Selects display mode 2 Press Cue then enter the Selects the desired cue number of the desired cue 3 Press the key that corre sponds to the attribute you want to modify Options include Type Time Wait Link and Follow 4 Enter the new setting for Modifies cue attribute the attribute 5 Press Enter Re records cue with modifications Note if you change the cue s type press Record Enter in step 5 Type changes will not take effect unless recorded 64 Express User Manual Using Update to modify channels in a cue The Update feature allows you to easily record changed levels on Stage into a selected cue You may record all levels on Stage into the cue or you may record only changes to channels that were previously recorded in the cue This allows you to modify the channel levels in the active cue then re record the cue without recording the entire stage look Note Levels provided by submasters aren t updated Only channel levels set on the keypad are recorded Follow these steps to use Update to modify a cue in Stage mode Keystrokes T 2 Press Stage Press Cue enter cue number and press Go
232. r creating and modify ing cues using several different methods If you follow the examples you will have several cues recorded You will also know how to modify copy and delete cues If you have several cues already stored you may want to use the look from one cue and modify it to create another In other circumstances you may want to enter all channel levels manually There are several ways you can go about creating any one look The fol lowing instructions give examples of how you could generate each cue Note Before you clear cues as described below make sure that the show currently in the console memory is saved on diskette The examples in this chapter assume there are no cues stored in the con sole To erase any cues press Setup 4 Enter 2 Enter Enter Viewing cues You can view stored cues in two ways live in Stage mode or just on the screen in Blind mode To view cues live you must select the cue and play it back in a fader See Chapter 9 Playing back cues for instructions To view a cue only on the screen select Blind mode and enter the desired cue number To view a different cue press Cue and the new cue number that you want to see In Blind mode you can also use and to move through recorded cues and cue parts one at a time Press Cue then press to display the next cue or part press to display the previous cue or part chapter 6 cues 51 Working with cues in Stage mode
233. r right or left on the trackpad to control channels in the X half of the link colored gold on the display Move your finger up or down to control channels in the Y half of the link colored yellow on the display Trackpad notes e f you have channels selected from both kinds of link the trackpad defaults to double mode e In double mode you may only set one side at a time 232 Setting up a link Express User Manual To set up alink you must assign at least one channel to the X channel list and one channel to the Y channel list In the following example two color scrollers are linked so that their color settings are controlled by the track pad For the two scrollers color is controlled by channels 1 and 11 respec tively To link two channels follow these steps Keystrokes 1 m Press Setup 1 1 Enter Press S7 Link List Press 1 Enter Press 1 gt Press 1 1 gt Press 0 gt Action Selects Channel Attributes display Selects Link List display Prompt reads Select link number Selects link 1 Prompt reads Select X channel number s Precede with AND to add to existing link or EXCEPT to delete from link Channel 1 is assigned to the link s X list Prompt reads Select Y channel number s Precede with AND to add to existing link or EXCEPT to delete from link Channel 11 is assigned to the link s Y list Link entry is complete Prompt reads Select f
234. r the backup look number 1 32 and press Enter Action Creates look on stage Selects Setup display Selects ETCLink Functions menu Selects System Status display Prompt reads Select backup look to record then press ENTER Advisory reads Record Backup processing has completed Press any key to continue 210 Express User Manual Playing a backup look Playing a backup look brings up the recorded look on stage You may play back a backup look from the console or from a CEM Only one backup look may be on stage at a time If there is a backup look on stage when you bring up a new one the second look replaces the first Up and down fade times for backup looks are five seconds They cannot be modified To use the Express to play a recorded backup look follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 9 ETCLink Fune Selects ETCLink Functions menu tions and press Enter 3 Press 1 Dimming Selects Dimming System Status System Status Enter display 4 Press S2 Play Backup Prompt reads Select backup look to play then press ENTER Enter 0 to return to normal operation 5 Enter the backup look Advisory reads number 1 32 and press Play Backup processing has Enter completed Press any key to continue Note To clear a playing backup look follow the procedure listed above but enter 0 in step 5 as the backup look number The currently playing backup
235. ration 1 DMX512 Port 2 DMX512 Mode 3 DMX512 Start 4 DMX512 Speed 8 Return gt Setup Effect 2 1 Step 2 Step Time 3 In Dwell Out 4 Low High 5 Insert Step 6 Delete Step 7 More Softkeys gt Effect 8 Attribute Attributes Subr 2 1 Step 2 Style 3 Select Cue 4 Type Level 5 Insert Step 6 Delete Step Express User Manual Attributes 1 Positive Negative 2 Alternate 3 Reverse 4 Bounce 5 Build 6 Random 7 Random Rate 8 Return gt Effect 7 More Softkeys gt Blind Subroutine 8 Up Down Follow System Settings 1 Purge Flexi 8 Return gt Setup Clear Functions 1 Reset System 8 Return gt Setup appendix e softkeys Print Functions 1 Stop Printer 2 Pause Printer 8 Return gt Setup Macro Editing 1 Select Macro 2 Insert Replace 3 Delete Entry 4 5 a 6 Delete Macro 7 More Softkeys gt Macro 2 8 Return gt Setup ETCLink Functions 1 Enable Disable ETCLink 2 A 3 B 4 5 6 Unset Dimmer 7 Set Dimmer 8 Return gt Setup Dimmer Status 4 System Status 5 Select Dimmer 6 Rack Status 7 8 Return gt ETCLink Channel Attributes 1 Independent 2 Flip 3 2 4 Previous Page 5 Next Page 6 a 7 Link List 8 Return gt Setup Real Time Clock 1 Select Program 2 Time 3 Days of Week 4 Macro 5 E 6 Delete Program 7 More Softk
236. reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR File sent to the printer To print a partial group printout from the Print menu follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press 3 Print Groups Enter Use the keypad to enter the first group in the range you wish to print Press Enter Use the keypad to enter the last group in the range you wish to print Press Enter Action Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all cues or select 1st cue number to print Prompt reads Press ENTER to print cue or select last cue number to print File sent to the printer chapter 16 printing Submasters 179 Print Submasters prints full information about all 240 submaster memo ries Submasters are listed by number Upfade dwell and downfade times and rates and labels are included in the printout Levels of all chan nels included in each submaster are also provided To print a full list of submasters follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 5 Print Functions Enter 3 Press 4 Print Submas ters Enter 4 Press Enter Action Displays Setup menu Displays Print menu Prompt reads Press ENTER to print all sub masters or press PAGE to select submasters to print File sent to the printer To print a partial submaster list follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press 4 Print Submas ters Enter 2 Press Pagel 3 Press 0 1 or 2 then press E
237. remote devices using a variety of external and timed interfaces This chapter describes the follow ing choices MIDI Real Time Clock Remote Macros Remote Trigger 214 MIDI Express User Manual MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface is a digital communication pro tocol that allows you to interconnect musical instruments and digital elec tronic equipment such as lighting control consoles If you are not familiar with MIDI and would like more information on how it works Control Sys tems for Live Entertainment by John Huntington includes several sec tions that deal with the subject Express supports two versions of MIDI In addition to ETC MIDI a propri etary MIDI implementation developed by ETC you may also use the entertainment lighting industry standard MIDI Show Control 1 0 MSC ETC MIDI The console both transmits and receives MIDI messages with any MIDI instrument The MIDI protocol can operate cues macros and submaster bump switches ETC assumes that MIDI users have a working knowledge of MIDI This section provides ETC MIDI interface information message formats and message definitions See Installing MIDI on page 252 for installation infor mation If you need more technical information about MIDI contact ETC Note Macros cannot execute MIDI commands chapter 20 control interfaces 215 Configuring ETC MIDI The console must be configured to operate in MIDI mode If you have any questions about t
238. ress S2 Insert Express indicates the editing mode in the upper left corner of the command dis play Editing keys lt and gt move the highlight left or right when you are editing a macro S3 Delete entry deletes highlighted keystroke Clearing macros You must be in Macro display mode to clear individual macros To clear all macros you can use the Clear Macros option from the Clear Functions menu as described on page 190 To clear macros follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 8 Macro Editing Selects Macro display mode and press Enter 3 Press S6 Delete Macro Prompt reads To delete macro s select macro num ber s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Enter macro or range of Corner reads macros you want to clear Macro 7 5 Press Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press Enter to clear the Clears macro 7 macro or Clear to cancel the action chapter 14 macros Copying macros 167 You may want to copy a macro or use macros as building blocks for new macros To copy contents of one macro to another follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 8 Macro Editing and press Enter Press S7 More Soft keys S5 Copy Macro Press 2 Press Enter Press 2 5 the number of the new macro Press Enter Actions Selects Setup display Select
239. ress the fader s Clear key twice to cancel an effect from the fader immediately Using an effect submaster An effect recorded to a submaster interacts with cues and other submas ters on a pile on basis Bring up the effect by pressing the submaster s bump button or raising the slider An effect submaster fades proportionally between zero and the effect s high level The slider acts as a master If the effect s low level is normally 10 percent moving the slider to 50 percent will reduce the effect s low level to 5 percent Note See Adding a rate to a submaster on page 125 for information on changing the rate of a submaster chapter 15 subroutines A subroutine is a cue that controls the playback of a series of recorded cues Subroutines are similar to linked cues except that they have more playback options You can use subroutines and effects to create similar looks However subroutines have some advantages over effects Since each step of a sub routine is a cue with channels set at proportional levels you can create loops or chases with proportional looks In an effect channels are assigned to steps but no levels are assigned Thus all channels in a step are at the same level You can also create nested loops or even use an effect cue as a step in a subroutine This chapter contains the following sections e Steps e Cue steps e Style steps e Creating a subroutine e Editing a subroutine e Deleting a step e
240. rmally This corresponds to how Blind displays levels channels that rise or fall are displayed in blue or green tracked channels are displayed in magenta chapter 7 track 75 Using record to create tracks In Stage mode the following keystrokes create the five cues illustrated below Each cue adds channels to the previous cue The example uses Record to record the cues Cue 1 Chan 1 Full Record 1 Enter Cue 2 Chan 2 Full Record 2 Enter Cue 3 Chan 3 Full Record 3 Enter Cue 4 Chan 1 At 2 5 Chan 4 Full Record 4 Enter Cue 5 Chan 1 Thru 4 At 0 0 Record 5 Enter These keystrokes produce the results illustrated in Figure 1 Chan1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chan5 Cue 1 FF Cue 2 FF FF Cue 3 FF FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Figure 1 Notice the vertical tracks that develop when a channel remains at the same level through a number of cues For example channel 1 tracks from cue 1 to cue 3 When a channel is not set at any level such as channel 5 above it is considered tracked at clear Express User Manual Recording modified cues The difference between Record and Track is apparent when you modify a cue or insert a new cue between two existing cues Record and Track pro duce different results The following keys were pressed to release captured channels and play back cue 1 Stage Rel Rel Release captured channels Cue 1 Go Play
241. round 14 12 Vdc fused 15 12 Vdc fused 262 Express User Manual appendix b error MESSAGES Diskette error messages Bad Disk Disk is unformatted or defective Try formatting it If that doesn t work try a different disk Write protected disk The write protect tab on this diskette is open Close the tab to unprotect the diskette No disk in drive Show diskette must be inserted in the diskette drive before you can save or read a show Disk controller failure Call ETC Technical Service at 800 775 4382 Unknown disk error try again Try the diskette again If it fails again call ETC Technical Service at 800 775 4382 Corrupted Disk This disk is defective Try formatting it If that doesn t work try a different disk File not found This disk does not appear to have a show stored on it Please confirm that you have inserted the correct disk Disk full Disk contains other files Remove enough files to make room for show file Disk access failed because of tracking failure This message appears on the backup console in a Full Tracking Backup system when the network or the master console fails during a diskette operation Other error messages Out of memory You have used up all system memory allotted to the function with which you are working Delete unnecessary parts of the show to free up mem ory If this doesn t work you may want to break the show into two shows one for each act This message may also ap
242. roup 2 5 And 2 6 Only Group 5 At 7115 Only Group 1 0 At 5 0 takes all the channels that are in group 25 and 26 sets those channels that are also in group 5 to 75 percent and sets those that are also in group 10 to 50 percent Page Use Page to load a different page into the submasters Active submas ters will hold their current look until the associated slider has been returned to its home position zero for pile on or effect submasters 10 for inhibitive submasters Example Pagel 2 Enter loads submaster page 2 Part Use Part to break a cue into multiple fades Each cue may contain up to eight parts A wait time may be assigned to each part to hold the start of that part A cue may be recorded as a multipart cue or may be broken into multiple parts at a later time A channel may be in only one part Example Stagel 15 Record 5 Part 1 Enter records channel 15 s current level into part 1 of cue 5 Patch The Patch display provides a list of dimmer to channel assignments with associated proportional levels and profiles appendix d reference 289 Pause Printer Pause Printer is softkey S2 in the Print Functions display Press S2 Pause Printer to interrupt a print function Press S2 again to resume printing Pile on submaster A pile on submaster contains a specified set of channels recorded at pro portional levels Pile on submasters interact with established chann
243. roup Label Misc Group Eric Group chapter 11 submasters This chapter includes instructions on using submasters A channel may be included in any number of submasters You can record a total of 240 submasters 24 submasters in each of ten pages of sub master memory Each submaster consists of a slider and a bump button with one LED The slider allows you to bring the submaster look up manually The bump button allows you to flash the submaster to its full recorded level or to begin its programmed fade if it has one The LEDs show you which slid ers contain recorded submasters This chapter includes the following sections Submaster types Submaster pages Playback Submaster List Submaster LEDs Submaster bump buttons Recording submasters Creating inhibitive submasters Modifying submasters in Blind Modifying submasters in Stage Using Update to modify submasters Live control of a submaster Controlling submaster fades manually Copying submasters Loading cues or groups to submasters Copying cues or groups to submasters Clearing submasters Submaster List 116 Express User Manual Submaster types Submasters can be pile on inhibitive or effect Pile on submaster A pile on submaster consists of channels recorded at proportional levels If a pile on submaster s channel levels are higher than established channel levels the submaster s levels take precedence except as noted below If they are lower the establ
244. rs clears the cue from the fader fading all channels in that fader to zero The default fader clear time determines the fade time for both Clear keys Channels black out immediately when clear time is zero Fade times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds in decimal format Fade times can be programmed from 1 second to 99 59 minutes Acceptable time values include 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 seconds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds Follow these steps to set a new default fade time Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setupl Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Set Selects System Settings menu tings and press Enter 3 Select 5 Default Fader Prompt reads Clear Time and press Enter default fader clear time Enter 4 Press 9 to enter the time Corner reads value you wish to assign Time 9 5 Press Enter New default time is set to nine seconds chapter 3 system settings Setting default Sneak time Sneak allows you to fade or restore channel levels on stage in a specified time The console allows you to assign a default Sneak time For more informa tion about the Sneak function see page 43 Default time is five seconds for a Sneak Follow these steps to set a new Sneak time Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Select 1 System Set tings and press Enter Select 6 Default Sneak Time and press Enter Action Selects Setup dis
245. rting dimmer number for DMX512 port 1 to 1 and DMX512 port 2 to 513 If you prefer you may set different starting numbers for the DMX512 ports For exam ple if your system included 10 racks each with 96 dimmers you could set the ports to start at 1 and 481 This would avoid having any rack receiv ing signals from two ports If you do so you will need to specify this in the I O Configuration screen To reset DMX512 port starting dimmer numbers follow these steps 1 Press Setup to display the Setup Menu 2 Press 2 Input Output Configuration and press Enter 3 Press J to select the port to configure port 1 or 2 4 Press S3 DMX512 Start 5 Enter the desired starting number for the port 6 Press Enter twice to confirm your choice 7 Display indicates port starting number 248 Express User Manual Setting Multiplex mode If your console is controlling an ETC Sensor dimming system that utilizes ETC s Multiplex dimming specify this in the I O Configuration screen Warning Changing a port to or from Multiplex mode resets your patch To configure your system for the type of fixtures you have follow these steps 1 Press Setup to display the Setup Menu 2 Press 2 Input Output Configuration and press Enter 3 Press S1 DMX512 Port enter the port to configure port 1 or 2 and press Enter You may also use J to select a port 4 Press S2 DMX512 Mode 5 Press 1 to set the port for
246. s Lir Lis Pos 1 11 06 AM X Chan Y Chan Pos Link X Chan Y Chan Pos Link X Chan Y Chan Pos 3 12 16 13 22 17 20 23 11 1 15 14 25 24 Link Position Link Link Link Return This chapter contains the following sections e Link List overview e Independent channels e Setting up a link e Using a link e Linking two moving lights e Flipped channels e Mirroring two moving lights e Using groups and Only with Link List e Modifying links 230 Express User Manual Link List overview Press Setup 1 1 Channel Attributes Enter S7 Link List to reach the Link List display When two or more channels are used together such as the pan and tilt channels for a moving light the Link List allows you to determine which of the wheels will control each channel Other channels that might com monly be linked include color and intensity channels for a color scroller or gobo and rotation rates A link allows channels to be simultaneously controlled on the trackpad When you select a channel it is placed under the control of the trackpad and all channels linked to it are also selected and placed under trackpad control Links may contain up to ten channels on each of the X and Y lists All chan nels in a link from one list are selected if any channel is selected from the other list Note Each channel may appear in only one link All channels on the X list are controlled by the X axis on the trackpad chan nels on the
247. s SETUP 3 ENTER 1 ENTER Confirms selection Macro contents line reads SETUP 3 ENTER 1 ENTER ENTER Stores macro 8 162 Express User Manual Next macro When you press Enter Macro the Macro display selects the next macro If you wish to begin recording the next macro press Enter Macro wait To program a pause in the macro in the Macro Editing display press S7 More Softkeys and insert S8 Macro Wait at the point in the macro where you want the pause to occur Enter the time you would like the macro to hold then press Enter Times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of sec onds in decimal format Times can be programmed from 1 second to 99 59 minutes Acceptable time values include 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 seconds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five min utes 30 seconds chapter 14 macros Linking macros Any macro may end with a link to another macro When macros are linked the first macro runs then the second macro follows automatically Press the appropriate macro key at the end of your sequence to create the link Pressing the macro key automatically ends and stores the macro 163 For example to create a macro that sets all active channels to 50 percent fades them out then runs another macro follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Z Press Setup 8 Enter Press 1 Enter Press Enter At 5 0 Enter Press S7 More Soft keys S8 Macro Wai
248. s Macro display mode Prompt reads Select macro number then press ENTER Prompt reads To copy macro s select macro number s to copy and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Enters the number of the macro you wish to copy Corner reads Macro 2 Prompt reads To copy selected macro s select target macro and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Macro 25 Macro copy is complete The contents of macro 2 have been copied into macro 25 Note In step 4 you may use And and Thru to enter multiple macros to copy If you do the new macros will be numbered consecutively starting with the macro you enter in step 6 168 Express User Manual Sample macros To create these sample macros go to Macro display mode Setup 8 Enter select a macro and enter the keystroke sequences as shown below Channel check This macro brings each channel up to full for a channel check Before you begin you ll probably want to bring up at least one channel for working light then clear all other channels from stage Press Stage and start macro Press macro key again to check each subsequent channel At 0 Enter Full Macro line reads At 0 Enter Full Auto channel check This macro automatically runs through each channel with a two second wait between each channel To pause the check press Macro Wait To resume macro press macro key again At 0 Enter Full Macro Wait 2 Enter M Macro
249. s applied A flipped channel outputs at full when set to zero and at zero when set to full Use S2 Flip to mark a channel flipped The flipped channels will have their outputs inverted The levels will not appear inverted on the Stage dis play Channel control can be flipped this inverts the level sent to the chan nel Use Flip to control moving lights Link the channels that control the pan attribute for moving lights on opposite sides of the stage and Flip one of the two channels When you control the two lights their movements are mirrored rather than parallel Follow Full Go Follow allows you to play a series of cues automatically The Follow time indicates how long the console waits after the cue starts before the next cue runs Follow plays back the next cue on the Cue List unless you use Link to specify a different sequence To remove a follow time from a cue press Follow Clear Example Cue 1 Follow 1 Enter assigns a follow time of one second to cue 1 Cue 2 will start one second after cue 1 starts Use Full to assign a level of 100 to a dimmer channel or group Example Channel 1 Thru 1110 Full sets channels 1 through 10 to 100 percent Press Go to execute the next cue in the key s associated fader Example Cue 1 A B Go runs cue 1 in the A B fader 282 Express User Manual Groups Express allows you to record frequently used combinations of channels into units c
250. sh you may enter To record loads select dim a specific dimmer or dim mer s and press ENTER mers to record Enter 0 to record loads for all dimmers 6 Press 0 Enter Advisory reads New loads will be recorded for all dimmers with levels above zero Levels on stage will change while the Record Load is in progress The system will automatically vary the dimmer outputs during the Record Load The process may take several minutes to complete Press Enter to proceed or press Clear to cancel 7 Press Enter to proceed New loads are recorded for all with the load record or dimmers with levels above zero press Clear to cancel the operation chapter 19 sensor dimming 201 Checking dimmer loads Load Check compares the current load on selected dimmers with their recorded loads Loads that differ by more than 20 percent are shown in the Load Management display Use Page and Page to page through the display The system checks load information only for selected dim mers To identify the dimmer s you wish to check use either the Express or the CEM to set the desired dimmers at a level above zero The system checks 24 dimmers per rack at a time until all dimmers at levels above zero have been checked If you have multiple racks 24 dim mers in each rack are checked simultaneously Note On single phase racks the system checks 16 dimmers per rack at a time Caution Load Check changes levels on stage Dimmer
251. stallation 246 Loads 199 Monitor loads 199 Express User Manual index 309 Monitoring 197 Multiplex 33 247 Patch 23 25 Pinout 246 Ports 247 Profile 28 Rack status 206 Record loads 200 Set 208 Setting 14 Strand CD80 rack 34 System settings 14 Unset 208 Dimming Sensor 197 DIP switch settings ETCNet 258 Remote Video Interface 257 258 Disable Disable ETCLink 277 ETCLink messages 212 MIDI 277 MIDI Show Control 219 Record Lockout 20 Diskette 169 Drive specifications 269 Erase diskette 171 Error messages 263 Format 171 Management 170 Read all 173 Read system settings 173 Record show 172 Display Blind 10 53 Channel Attributes 37 Clear Functions 186 Cue List 70 Dimmer Status 207 Dimmer System Status 205 Diskette Functions 169 Group List 114 Groups 102 Input Output Configuration 247 Load Errors 204 Macro 161 Patch 12 Print Functions 176 Rack status 206 Setup 294 Specifications 268 Stage 9 51 System Settings 13 DMX512 247 248 Connectors 246 Mode 278 310 Pinout 246 Ports 247 278 Speed 248 278 Starting number 247 278 Down 299 Down Arrow 278 Dwell 138 278 283 Dwell time 138 Effect 145 Submaster 122 123 124 Edit Clear submasters 133 Copy cues 68 Copy groups 110 Copy submaster 131 132 Cue in Blind 54 Cue List 70 Delete cue 67 Effects 147 149 Load submaster 132 Macro 166 Range of effect steps 141 Range of groups 71 Range of submasters 135 Submasters 128 Update cue 65 Effect 4
252. step enter the number of times you want the loop to return to the top of the step list If you enter 5 the sequence will play six times Enter 0 to create a continuous loop Bounce The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Bounce step It then runs back through the steps in reverse order and repeats the sequence for the number of times you specify When you create the Bounce step enter the number of times you want the subroutine to bounce One bounce equals running through the sequence forward once and reverse once Enter 0 for a continuous bounce Jump to cue The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Jump to cue step It then automatically starts another cue which is not included in the subrou tine You can jump to any type of cue regular subroutine or effect When you create the Jump to cue step enter the number of the cue to which to jump Hold for Go The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Hold for Go step It then pauses until you press Go 154 Express User Manual Subroutine attributes The following attributes may be applied to each cue step Level Sets an intensity level for the cue within the subroutine The level propor tionally affects the channel levels assigned to the original cue Levels must be entered as two digit numbers e g 20 for 20 percent 05 for five percent Use Full for 100 percent Fade times Upfade times may range from 1 seconds to 99 59 mi
253. sters 129 V Viewing cues 50 W Wait 86 Multipart 88 Wait time 299 Record cue 57 Wheel 233 321 322 X X wheel 230 233 Y Y wheel 230 233 Express User Manual
254. submasters 1 through 5 in one command Follow these steps to do so Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Sub S2 Displays Submaster List Sub List 2 Press 1 Thru 5 Selects submasters 1 through 5 Prompt reads Select submaster number s 3 Press Time and enter 5 Prompt reads Enter upfade time 4 Press Enter Sets upfade time for submasters 1 through 5 to five seconds 136 Express User Manual chapter 12 effects An effect runs steps containing channels in a variety of patterns called chases An effect can be positive with lights starting off and being turned on in patterns or negative with lights starting on and being turned off in patterns Express allows you to record effects each with up to 100 steps into cues or submasters Each effect includes level and timing controls for the steps in the effect and overall timing controls for the effect itself Each effect step can last for up to 99 59 minutes Note Channel levels are not affected by an effect until a step runs that specifically addresses the channel This chapter includes the following sections e Steps e Creating steps e Configuring effects e Modifying effects e Running an effect cue e Using an effect submaster 138 Express User Manual Steps An effect may consist of up to 100 steps A step is made up of elements Elements may be either channels or groups Each step may contain up to ten elements For example channels 1 through
255. t e Keep diskettes away from magnets magnetized objects or heavy electrical equipment including large lighting equipment e Do not touch the magnetic disk inside the plastic diskette case e Do not eat drink or smoke when you handle diskettes chapter 15 diskette functions Formatting diskettes 171 Warning Formatting a diskette erases all information recorded on the dis kette Formatting does not affect show in console Before you can use a diskette in an Express you must format it on either an Expression 2 line console or a standard PC compatible personal com puter To format a diskette on Express follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 3 Disk Functions Enter 3 Insert standard 3 5 inch high density diskette in disk drive 4 Press 4 Format Disk Enter Action Selects Setup display Selects Diskette Functions menu The following screen appears 5 Press Enter to format the diskette or press Clear to cancel the format command Message appears on screen Formatting disk Do not remove from drive Message remains until disk is formatted Warning When you select this option any fade in progress stops once the formatting process is complete the fade jumps to the point it would have reached if it hadn t been interrupted 172 Express User Manual Recording a show on diskette When you record a show to diskette all system settings patch settings cues
256. t 1110 Enter Press Enter At 0 Enter Press M3 Action Selects Macro editing mode Selects macro 1 to create Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press MACRO ENTER when done Wheels and poten tiometers are not valid entries in macros Sets all active channels to 50 percent Macro line reads ENTER AT 50 ENTER Macro pauses for ten seconds Macro line reads ENTER AT 5 0 ENTER Mwait 10 Fades all active channels out Macro line reads ENTER AT 5 0 ENTER Mwait 10 ENTER AT 0 ENTER Stores macro Links macro to macro 3 Macro line reads ENTER AT 5 0 ENTER Mwait 10 ENTER AT 0 ENTER M3 Note You may also link a macro to a cue so the macro will run at the same time the cue does See Chapter 6 Working with cues for more details 164 Express User Manual Using submasters in macros Submaster bump buttons can function in macros in three different ways as a normal bump button to always fade a submaster to full regardless of its current condition or to always fade a submaster out regardless of its current condition To include a bump button that starts a timed submaster or changes the direction of a running fade press the submaster bump button while pro gramming the macro Use S1 On Sub Bump to fade the submaster up regardless of its cur rent setting Use S2 Off Sub Bump to fade a submaster out regardless of its current setting To create a macro that turns a s
257. t settings For example if Level is set at 75 percent press 1 Thru 5 Levell to set channels 1 2 3 4 and 5 to 75 percent Flash Flash sets the selected channel s level to 100 percent if the channel is cur rently at a level at or below 50 percent If the channel s level is above 50 percent Flash sets it to zero Levels set by Flash are only maintained while the key is pressed For example press Channel 5 then press and hold S8 Flash to set channel 5 to either 100 or zero chapter 5 setting channel levels 43 Sneak Sneak is a softkey that you can use to fade channels on stage to a level you choose in a specific time or to restore channels to the last level at which they were set with a fader or submaster For example if you bring up a cue then change the look you can use sneak to go back to the look created by the original cue If you do not indicate a time the sneak occurs in the default sneak time set in System Settings Follow these steps to use Sneak to set a channel level Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Press S1 Sneak Selects Sneak mode Prompt reads Sneak mode Select channels then press ENTER to sneak or AT to select sneak level or TIME to select sneak time 3 Select the channel s you Selects channel 5 Sets level at want to sneak and the level 50 percent to which you want it to Prompt reads fade For example press Sneak mode Select level 5
258. t cue number To select cue type press TYPE Selects cue 1 5 to play Cue List moves cue 1 5 to the top of the list Cue 1 5 runs on fader A B Cue 2 moves to the top of the Cue List Cue 2 starts to run on fader C D Express User Manual Go Each fader has its own Go key Press Go to play back the cue selected on the Cue List If you have pressed Hold to interrupt the playback of a cue press Go to resume the fade If you press Go before a cue finishes playing the previous cue stops and the new cue begins from the levels at which the previous cue was inter rupted Hold Each fader has its own Hold key If a cue is running press Hold to pause playback of the cue Press Hold a second time to cancel playback of the cue in the fader leaving it in the fader where it stopped or press Go to resume the fade Back Each fader has its own Back key Press Back to replay the cue most recently played on that fader Press Back again to play the cue before it on the Cue List and so forth moving backward through the Cue List Cues play back using the fade and wait times recorded with the cue Note The cue following the cue replayed by Back becomes the first cue in the Cue List If you then press Go that cue plays Note Back ignores cue links This example demonstrates the use of the Go Hold and Back keys Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage mode display 2 Press Cue 2
259. t without ETC s prior written authorization ETC shall not be responsible for any incidental general or consequential damages damages to prop erty damages for loss of use time profits or income or any other damages The owner s obligations during the war ranty period under this warranty are to notify ETC at ETC s address within one week of any suspected defect and to return the goods prepaid to ETC at their fac tory or authorized service center THIS WARRANTY IS CONTINGENT ON THE CUSTOMER S FULL AND TIMELY COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS OF PAY MENT SET FORTH IN THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND OF OTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITIES ON OUR PART THE OWNER ACKNOWL EDGES THAT NO OTHER REPRESENTA TIONS WERE MADE TO HIM OR RELIED UPON HIM WITH RESPECT TO THE QUALITY AND FUNCTION OF THE GOODS SOLD This written warranty is intended as a com plete and exclusive statement of the terms thereof Prior dealings or trade usage shall not be relevant to modify explain or vary this warranty Acceptance of or acquiesc ing in a course of performance under this warranty shall not modify the meaning of this agreement even though either party has knowledge of the performance and a chance to object table of contents Chapter 1 I
260. te Dwell time is the length of time the effect runs between the upfade of the first step and the downfade of the last step Hold assigns an infinite dwell time meaning the effect runs until the associated Clear key or bump button is pressed to start the downfade Times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of sec onds in decimal format Times can be programmed from 1 second to 99 59 minutes Acceptable time values include 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 seconds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds Change upfade dwell and downfade Follow these steps to change the effect s fade times Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press Time and enter the Prompt reads upfade time Enter effect upfade time 3 Press Time and enter the Prompt reads dwell time Enter effect dwell time 4 Press Time and enter the Prompt reads downfade time Press Enter effect downfade time Clear for hold dwell 5 Press Enter Fade time entry is complete Prompt reads Select step numbers Change upfade only Follow these steps to change only the effect s upfade time Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press Timel Prompt reads Enter effect upfade time 3 Enter the upfade time Prompt reads Enter effect upfade time 4 Press Enter Enter Prompt reads Enter Select step numbers chapter 12 effects
261. te attribute press S7 Clear Example S7 Random Rate 5 0 S7 Random Rate 2 0 0 to set the minimum rate to 50 percent and the maximum rate to 200 percent Rate fader Press the fader s Rate key to allow the fader rate to be controlled by the rate wheel Example A B Rate Trackpad adjusts the rate of the fade in fader A B appendix d reference 291 Rate Rate is softkey S3 in the Stage Blind and List displays Use S3 Rate to edit the rate for a cue submaster multipart cue effect or subroutine Also use S3 Rate to place the timing for a submaster under rate wheel control Example S3 Rate Sub Bump 3 followed by adjustment of the rate wheel modifies submaster 3 s fade times Record Use Record to save all cue submaster or group information in console memory Example Record 6 Time 3 Enter records cue 6 and sets its fade time to 3 seconds Example 1 Thru 6 Record Sub Bump 1 records channels 1 through 6 to submaster 1 Record Backup Record Backup is softkey S3 in the System Status display Use S3 Record Backup to store a recording of a selected look on stage in a Sensor CEM You may record up to 32 backup looks Record Loads Record Loads is softkey S5 in the Load Management display Use S5 Record Loads to record load information for all dimmers set at a level above zero Choose the dimmers you wish to record set them to a level then run Record Lo
262. ter Action Selects Setup display mode Selects Real Time Programs display Prompt reads Select program number s to move then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects programs 1 through 5 to move Prompt reads To move selected programs s select time and press ENTER Press to enter AM or PM Copies program 1 to a new pro gram starting at 5 00 PM the rest of the programs maintain their original relationship in time 226 Express User Manual Remote macros The Remote macro feature provides the ability to access up to 4 macros from locations up to 1000 feet from the main console Typically the Remote Macro control device is a four button control station The remote macro outputs control macros 1 901 through 1 904 To run one of these macros from a remote location press the appropriate con trol ETC does not provide remote macro units However the console does provide a 15 pin connector labeled Remote Go to which you may attach a user supplied remote macro control device See Installing remote macros on page 261 for more information about installing remote macros chapter 20 control interfaces 227 Remote trigger The remote trigger function allows you to program a macro to send an On or Off signal to any external device that responds to a remote contact clo sure This signal can control any external event for example a sound machine or a bubble machine To create a simple remote trigger macro follo
263. th mac ros for information about creating macros Follow these steps to link a macro to a cue Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage or Blind Selects display mode 2 Cue 6 Selects cue 6 3 Press Link Prompt reads To link to cue select cue number To link to macro press ENTER MACRO 4 Press Enter Macro Prompt reads To link to macro select macro number To link to cue press CUE 5 Press 7 Enter Records cue 6 linked to macro 7 When you press Go to play cue 6 macro 7 will run at the same time 62 Express User Manual Recording a cue using Solo Solo lets you record a cue that contains some of the channels that make up the current look but not others Often you will create cues by adding to subtracting from and modifying previously recorded cues Follow these steps to create a cue using Solo Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage or Blind Selects display mode 2 Press Channell Prompt reads Select channel numbers 3 Press 2 01 Enters channel number to mark the start of the selected range 4 Press Thrul Indicates you are selecting a range of channels 5 Press 3 0 Selects channels 20 through 30 6 Press S7 More Softkeys Sets all channels other than 20 S8 Solo through 30 to zero Prompt reads To restore levels press SOLO Select channel numbers 7 Use trackpad press Full Sets channels 60 through 70 to Level or or use At anew level and numer
264. the disk Standard patch When you start your next show read the Standard patch show into the console then begin writing cues to avoid reentering the patch chapter 4 patch 25 Patching dimmers to channels Follow these steps to patch a dimmer s to a control channel Keystrokes Ts 2 Press Patch Press Dim If the LED in the Dim key is lit you may omit this step Use the keypad to enter the numbers of the dim mers you want to patch Use And and Thru if you want to select more than one dimmer Press Enter Enter the channel number to which you want to patch the selected dimmers and press Enter Repeat steps 2 through 4 to patch additional dim mers Action Selects Patch display Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile Prompt reads To assign dimmers select channel number then press ENTER To delete dimmers press UNPATCH Dimmer s are patched to the channel 26 Proportional patching Express User Manual Express allows you to proportionally inhibit the output of individual dimmer levels from the Patch display Dimmers output at 100 percent unless you patch them at a lower level Dimmer intensity levels set in Patch function at full level on all other screens For example if you enter a level of 60 for a dimmer on the patch screen when you set that channel t
265. ther the circuit breaker has tripped or the dimmer needs to be replaced Dimmer s load has failed The most likely cause is a lamp failure Either replace the lamp or to prevent further error messages use Clear Load or Record Load Data error on Rack DMX port A B Please check DMX cabling and connections between the console and the rack Rack ambient temperature is high at degrees F The temperature does not yet exceed acceptable operational limits but the rack should be checked Please check the cooling ventilation in the dimmer room Rack ambient temperature is low at degrees F Please check the cooling ventilation in the dimmer room Rack ambient temperature is outside the acceptable operating range at degrees F Please check the cooling ventilation in the dimmer room immediately The phasing in Rack is not allowed The rack has been shut down Please check the input power service 266 Express User Manual appehdix c specifications Electrical Voltage input 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 0 8 amps Internal interfaces Up to 1 024 DMX512 outputs Parallel printer Remote Focus Unit Remote Macro option Remote Trigger option MIDI ETCLink Work lights System capacity 600 cues per show 125 or 250 control channels Proportional patching of up to 1 024 DMX512 dimmers Eight part multipart cues Ten dimmer profile options 500 groups 2 000 macros 24 overlapping submasters Ten pag
266. tions display Use S1 Enable ETCLink to allow dimmer monitoring on a system con nected by ETCLink to a Sensor dimming system Softkey then reads Dis able ETCLink Enter Use Enter to advance the operator prompt or terminate verify selected console functions Example Record 6 Enter records cue 6 Example Load Sub 5 Group 6 Enter Enter Macro Use Enter Macro to terminate the recording of a macro instruction This is the last step in recording a macro whether in Learn mode or blind Macro Edit unless an instruction to run another macro is used to termi nate recording Example Learn 9 Enter Record Cue 5 Except Sub 1 Enter Macro records macro 9 280 Express User Manual Except Use Except to exclude channels dimmers or groups from selection or record operations Example Record Cue 5 Except Sub 3 Enter records the current look in cue 5 except for the channels included in submaster 3 Example Channel 1 Thru 9 Except 5 At 5 sets channels 1 through 4 and 6 through 9 at 50 percent Fader status display The fader status display consists of two windows at the bottom of the playback monitor It provides information about the cues loaded to Express s faders including fade times and rates The left window moni tors the A B fader the right window monitors the C D fader The display counts down wait times for cues and indicates which step is running when a
267. u are not sure 2 Connect up to two DMX512 cables 1 024 outputs to DMX512 output connectors on back panel of console Output connector location is shown on page 244 DMX512 connector XLR 5 pin female 512 digital multiplex dimmers DMX512 pinout ORWN Common Data Data not connected not connected Replacing the auxiliary fuse If external devices the RFU work lights or remote macros fail to operate correctly and you suspect the console fuse might be the problem follow these steps to replace the fuse il 2 3 Turn off the console Remove the power cord Using a small flat head screwdriver genly press and rotate counter clockwise the fuse holder labeled External 12V Replace the fuse with a fuse of rating F1 6A Do not use a fuse with any other rating This is a 1 6 amp 250 V fuse appendix a installation 247 System configuration Once your console is installed you may need to reset some hardware configuration settings The Input Output Configuration screen allows you to reset the DMX512 starting numbers for your DMX512 ports set your ports for ETC Multiplex dimming and adjust the DMX512 signal speed if your dimming system requires a slower signal 09 16 AM DMX512 Ports Operating Mode Starting DMX512 Number Normal iz 2 Normal 513 Current DMX512 Transmission Speed Max Mode Start Speed Return Setting DMX512 starting numbers When you install your Express the console sets the sta
268. ubmaster on for five seconds then turns it off follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 8 Enter Selects Macro editing mode 2 Press 4 Enter Selects macro 4 to create Prompt reads Select opera tion s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels and sliders are not valid entries in macros 3 Press S7 More Soft Macro line reads OnBump keys S1 On Sub Bump Prompt reads Enter submaster number 4 Press 3 Enter Macro line reads OnBump3 5 Press S8 Macro Wait Macro line reads OnBump3 Mwait 0 6 Enter 5 and press Enter Macro line reads OnBump3 Mwait 5 7 Press S2 Off Sub Macro line reads Bump OnBump3 Mwait 5 OffBump Prompt reads Enter submaster number 8 Press 3 Enter Macro line reads OnBump3 Mwait 5 OffBump3 9 Press Enter Macro Records macro 4 leaves editing mode 10 Press Stage M4 Macro runs chapter 14 macros 165 Playing macros As a macro runs the LED in the macro s key flashes Only one macro may run at a time To run macros 1 through 5 press the appropriate macro key For example to run macro 1 press M1 To play a macro recorded in M1 M5 follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Press M Macro runs prompt shows sequence of activity as if you were entering the keystrokes To run any other macro press M the number of the macro and Enter For exampl
269. ue List Print Group List Print Submaster List Print Macros Print Patch WONOMAWON Dee ee ae en ee A a a Print Channel Attributes Print Real Time Programs Printer Printer Return You may pause the current printing job or cancel it at any time while print ing To stop the printer temporarily while it is printing press S2 Pause Printer The printer prints a few more lines then stops and waits Press S2 again to resume printing To cancel a print job press S1 Stop Printer The printer prints a few more lines then stops Stage display Print Stage display prints channel settings as they currently appear on Stage To print a Stage display report follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 5 Print Functions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3 Press 1 Print Stage Dis Prompt reads play Enter To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter or press File sent to the printer Clear to cancel the print operation chapter 16 printing Cues 177 Print Cues prints a list of cues recorded in the currently loaded show Cues are listed by number Information provided includes all cue attributes and levels of all channels included in each cue To print a full list of cues follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Z Press Setup Press 5 Print Functions Enter Press 2 Print Cues Enter Press Enter Press
270. unction to link two or more chan nels and then select any linked channel the trackpad automatically switches into double mode In double mode the trackpad is divided into two regions The left side con trols channels in the X half of the link colored gold on the display The right side controls channels in the Y half of the link colored yellow on the display Move your finger up or down on either side to control channel levels in the corresponding link XY mode If you use the Link List function to link two or more chan nels and set the link s position attribute for XY position then select any linked channel with that attribute the trackpad automatically switches into XY mode In XY mode move your finger right or left on the trackpad to con trol channels in the X half of the link colored gold on the display Move your finger up or down to control channels in the Y half of the link colored yellow on the display Trackpad notes e f you have channels selected from both kinds of link the trackpad defaults to Double mode e In Double mode you may only set one side at a time Sensitivity To the left of the trackpad you will find two buttons that control sensitivity The top button has a rough texture Press this to set the trackpad for low sensitivity The lower button has a smooth texture Press this to set the trackpad for high sensitivity Use high sensitivity for precise level or rate adjustments Use low s
271. unctions Enter Press 6 Print Group List Enter Press Enter or press Clear to cancel the print operation Action Displays Setup menu Displays Print Functions menu Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR File sent to the printer chapter 16 printing Submaster List 181 Print Submaster List prints full information about all 240 submaster mem ories Submasters are listed by number Upfade dwell and downfade times and rates and labels are included in the printout To print a full submaster list printout follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 5 Print Functions Enter 3 Press 7 Print Submas ter List Enter 4 Press Enter or press Clear to cancel the print operation Action Displays Setup menu Displays Print Functions menu Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR File sent to the printer 182 Macros Express User Manual Print Macros prints a list of macro sequences recorded in the currently loaded show Macros are listed by number The printout provides com plete information about each macro and its keystrokes To print a full macro list follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 5 Print Functions Enter Press 8 Print Macros Enter Press Enter Press Enter or press Clear to cancel the print operation Action Displays Setup menu
272. ut main voltage is in error at V Rack input main frequency is out of spec at Hz Rack has shut down due to fan failure or other interruption of air flow Please check the rack looking for dirty air filters blocked air passages or fan failure ETCLink has failed Please check cabling and connections If the prob lem persists please call a qualified service technician Rack processor error appendix b error messages 265 Secondary Messages Dimmer has a load but the recorded load is zero Because the recorded load is zero the Dimmer Monitoring system is unable to determine whether the dimmer has a load error The load on dimmer has changed Because the dimmer output is not at a high enough level the Dimmer Monitoring system is unable to determine the size of the load To correct the problem use Check Loads to determine the size of the load change The load on dimmer has changed from W to W A decreased load indicates lamp failure An increased load indicates that a lamp has been added since the last Record Load Correct the problem or to prevent further error messages use Clear Load or Record Load DC output has been detected on dimmer If this condition persists it may harm the connected load Please check the connected load An SCR has failed On Off in dimmer The dimmer should be replaced Dimmer output has failed on The dimmer should be replaced Dimmer output has failed off Ei
273. utomatically selects linked cues You must be in Stage mode to select cues to play back but you can run the selected cue from either Stage or Blind by pressing Go When one cue is playing Express automatically selects the next cue on the Cue List to play next To play the next cue press the Go key under the fader in which you want the cue to be played If you are working in Stage mode you see the cue running on the monitor To select a cue other than the next on the Cue List press Cue and enter the cue number Then press Go to play the cue Cues that have been assigned a Follow time begin playing automatically once the cue before them on the Cue List finishes When you play a string of follow cues you only need to start the first cue chapter 9 playing back cues 91 Timed faders Express has two timed faders that allow you to play back recorded cues In each fader the left slider A and C controls upfades The right slid ers B and D control downfades You may play back a cue automatically using the timing infor mation programmed into it or you may take manual control N 10 You can play back cues one at a time through a single fader or you can play back a different cue in each fader simultaneously You can also play a cue in one fader leave it there and then play another cue in the second fader For example you may want to play a ten minute sunset cyc cue in one fader and play several cues during the same
274. w these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display screen 2 Select 8 Macro Editing Selects Macro display screen and press Enter Prompt reads Select macro number then press ENTER 3 Press 1 0 Enter Macro 10 created Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels and slid ers are not valid entries in macros 4 Press S7 MoreSoftkeys Enters an On Trigger command S3 On Trigger Macro contents line reads OnTrigger 5 Press S8 Macro Wait 5 Enters a macro wait of 5 seconds Enter Macro contents line reads OnTrigger Mwait 5 6 Press S4 Off Trigger Enters an Off Trigger command Macro contents line reads OnTrigger Mwait 5 OffTrigger 7 Press Enter Macrol Saves macro Macro 10 sends an On Trigger command waits five seconds then sends an Off Trig ger command 228 Express User Manual chapter 21 moving lights Express channels can control intensity color pan or tilt for an automated lighting device such as a moving light or color scroller By linking channels using Express s Link List you can use multiple channels to control combi nations of these attributes for one or more instruments Link List allows you to link channels together for simultaneous control on the two wheels The Flip attribute can create parallel or mirrored linked channel actions Mirrored actions are particularly useful when you are working with moving light
275. x format Note off message format lt 8n gt lt kk gt lt vv gt 8 Note off status n MIDI channel number 0 F kk Key number 0 7F vv Note off velocity 0 7F Note on message format lt 9n gt lt kk gt lt vv gt 9 Note on status n MIDI channel number 0 F kk Key number 0 7F vv Note on velocity 0 7F 00 Note off Control change message format lt Bn gt lt kk gt lt vv gt B Control change status n MIDI channel number 0 F kk Control number 70 92 vv Control value 0 7F Program change message format lt Cn gt lt kk gt C Program patch change status n MIDI channel number 0 F kk Program number 0 7F chapter 20 control interfaces 217 MIDI Message definitions Submaster bump switch execution Submasters 1 12 C5 B5 60 71 Submasters 13 24 C6 B6 72 83 Note C5 MIDI note 60 or middle C Cue execution in AB fader pair Next cue Cues 1 127 Cues 128 255 Cues 256 383 Cues 384 511 Cues 512 639 Cues 640 767 Cues 768 895 Cues 896 999 Program change 0 Program change 1 127 Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro Contro ler change 70 ler change 71 ler change 72 ler change 73 ler change 74 ler change 75 ler change 76 Cue execution in CD fader pair parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 103 Next cue Controller change 77 parameter O Cues 1
276. y cyan magenta and yellow for a specific fix ture Group 1 contains all channels for fixture 1 01 02 03 04 05 06 Group 2 contains all channels for fixture 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 Group 3 contains all channels for fixture 3 21 22 23 24 25 26 Group 4 contains all channels for fixture 4 31 32 33 34 35 36 The next three groups each contain all the channels that control one parameter for your moving lights Group 5 contains all pan controlling channels 01 11 21 31 Group 6 contains all tilt controlling channels 02 12 22 32 Group 7 contains all level controlling channels 03 13 23 33 Next in the Link List create a set of links that link each fixture s pan chan nel to its tilt channel Put all the pan channels on the X list and all the tilt channels on the Y list Now any time you select either the pan channel or the tilt channel for any of these fixtures both parameters will be selected and placed on the X and Y wheels Press Group 1 And Group 3 S7 Only Group 5 This selects the pan channels for fixtures 1 and 3 Link List then places them on the X list and selects the tilt channels and places them on the Y list Both fixtures positions are now controlled by the trackpad 238 Inserting a link Express User Manual Use the edit features softkey S5 Insert Link to insert an empty link number ahead of the selected or specified link All subsequent links will be renumbered Note The order in which
277. y on the System Settings display updates the list of used channels The list is also updated when you load a show from diskette or when you first turn Flexichannel on Press Setup 1 Enter S1 Purge Flexi to update Flexichannel displays Express User Manual Patch The Patch display allows you to create and modify your patch O O Chon 1 Profiles O L inear 1 IES Square 2 ho 3 Fast Bottom 4 Slow Top 5 Fast Top 6 Full at 1 7 P ea YA 8 Preheat 10 9 Hot Patch Chan Dimmer Level Profile 501 502 8076 503 4B Display mode Current display mode and time Keypad prompt corner This window indicates how the console will interpret the next number entered from the keypad For example if you press Channel the corner displays Chan indicating that the console will read the next number as a channel number If you enter a range only the last number in the range will appear Profile menu Displays the profiles available to assign to dimmers Patch window Lists channels dimmers patched to channels and levels and or pro files assigned to the dimmers In Flexichannel mode channels that are used are marked with an asterisk Operator prompt line The operator prompt displays messages to guide you through Patch functions Softkeys Patch functions for S1 through S8 chapter 5 System settings System settings allow you to customize Express for the number of dim mers and channels i
278. you begin patching you can select dim mers from channel zero and patch them to channels as you like Dimmers assigned to channel zero are listed at the end of channel list under These dimmers are not assigned to any channel but remain on the patch screen Follow these steps to assign dimmers to channel zero in By Dimmer mode Keystrokes Action 1 Press Patch Selects Patch display 2 If the Dim LED is unlit Prompt reads press Dim to indicate that Select dimmer numbers then the next number entered press ENTER to assign to a will be a dimmer channel or press AT to assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile 3 Use the keypad to enter Prompt reads the desired dimmer num Select dimmer numbers then ber s Use And and Thru press ENTER to assign to a if you want to select more channel or press AT to assign than one dimmer a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile 4 Press S6 Unpatch Selected dimmers are unpatched and assigned to chan nel zero Show labels In the Patch display Express allows you to view labels assigned to dim mers Press S8 Show Hide Labels to reveal or hide the labels Hiding labels provides space to show additional dimmers Express User Manual Assigning a profile to a dimmer Dimmer profiles allow you to select one of ten output curves profiles and assign it to a dimmer These profiles allow you to compensate for non linear light outputs from certai
279. ype indicates whether the port is normal or Multiplex indicates a normal port e Status indicates the present status of the port e Rack voltage displays the input voltage for each of the three phases A B and C Single phase racks only display values for A and C e Rack frequency displays the input frequency in hertz Hz e Ambient temperature displays the temperature of the air drawn into the rack by the rack s fan Ambient temperature is not displayed unless the fan is running Note Rack error messages appear beneath the ambient temperature chapter 19 sensor dimming 207 Dimmer status The Dimmer Status display provides information about dimmers including size and type recorded load firing mode output curve rack slot panic mode and boost Press Setup 9 Enter 3 Enter to access the Dimmer Status display Has errors Recorded Firing urve tack Slo Pan ic Boost Load Mode Mode Fee 12004 Feedback 650W Feedback 1200W Feedback 9004 eedback 9004 edback 39004 k 4504 k 7004 I ow k ow k ow k ow k ow k OW k ow k ou F F F F F OA F F F F F F F e Type shows the dimmer s amperage and whether the dimmer is high rise or standard Feedback indicates that the dimmers are Advanced Features modules e Recorded load displays the load at which the selected dimmer was recorded e Firing mode indicates whether the dimmer is normal multiplexed or switched indicates a normal firing

ETC Express 125 & 250 v2.0 - Premier Lighting and Production

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ETC Express 125 &amp; 250 v2.0 - Premier Lighting and Production

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ETC Express 125 & 250 v2.0 - Premier Lighting and Production